Loading...
REVIEWED RESUB1 FIR2023-0004+Fire_Sprinkler_Equipment_Specification_Sheets+2.20.2023_10.59.47_AM+3377985RESUB F I R2023-0004 Feb 21 2023 CITY OF EDMONDS DEVELOPMENT SERVICES DEPARTMENT IM= FIREPROTECTION [220118]Port of Edmonds 471 Admiral Way, Edmonds WA Material And Data Book 113 Cherry St, PMB #41900 (425) 271-5598 State Contractor's License Seattle, WA 98104 Fax: (425) 496-8363 # MOOREFP116NP THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Page 1 of 4 ® MICROFAST° QUICK RESPONSE UPRIGHT SPRINKLER VK350 (K8.0) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com 1. DESCRIPTION The Viking Microfast° Quick Response Upright Sprinkler VK350 is a small, thermosensitive, glass -bulb spray sprinkler available in several different finishes, tem- perature ratings, and K-Factors to meet design requirements. The special Polyester, and Electroless Nickel PTFE (ENT) coatings can be used in decorative applications where colors are desired. In addition, these coatings have been investigated for instal- lation in corrosive environments and are listed/approved as indicated in the Approval Charts. 2. LISTINGS AND APPROVALS c@us cULus Listed: Category VNIV Mo FM Approved: Class Series 2000 vds VdS Approved: Certificates G414017, G414018, G4980020, and G4060054 LPCB LPCB Approved: Certificate 096e/03 E CE: Standard EN 12259-1,DOP Sprinklers _VdS_23-5-13, DOP Sprinklers_LPCB_5-2-19 & DOP_VK350ENT_6-11-19 China Approval: Approved according to China GB standard MED Certified: Standard EN 12259-1, EC -certificate of conformity 0832- MED-1003 WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm- www.P65Warnings.ca.gov NOTE: Other International approval certificates are available upon request. Refer to Approval Chart 1 and Design Criteria cULus Listing requirements, and refer to Approval Chart 2 and Design Criteria FM Approval requirements that must be followed. 3. TECHNICAL DATA Specifications: Minimum Operating Pressure: 7 psi (0.5 bar)* Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi (12 bar) wwp. Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (34.5 bar) Testing: U.S.A. Patent No. 4,831,870 Thread size: 1/2" NPT, 15 mm BSPT, 3/4" NPT, or 20 mm BSPT Nominal K-Factor: 8.0 U.S. (115.2 metric**) Glass -bulb fluid temperature rated to -65 °F (-55 °C) Overall Length: 2-5/16" (59 mm) *Wl_us Listing, FM Approval, and NFPA 13 installs require a minimum of 7 psi (0.5 bar). The minimum operating pressure for LPCB and CE Approvals ONLY is 5 psi (0.35 bar). Material Standards: Frame Casting: Brass UNS-C84400 Deflector: Copper UNS-C19500 Bulb: Glass, nominal 3 mm diameter Belleville Spring Sealing Assembly: Nickel Alloy, coated on both sides with PTFE Tape Screw: Brass UNS-C36000 Pip Cap and Insert Assembly: Copper UNS-C11000 and Stainless Steel UNS-S30400 For Polyester Coated Sprinklers: Belleville Spring -Exposed For ENT Coated Sprinklers: Belleville Spring -Exposed, Screw and Pipcap - ENT plated. Ordering Information: (Also refer to the current Viking price list.) Order Viking Microfast® Quick Response Upright Sprinkler VK350 by first adding the appropriate suffix for the sprinkler finish and then the appropriate suffix for the temperature rating to the sprinkler base part number. Finish Suffix: Brass = A, Chrome = F, White Polyester = M-/W, Black Polyester = M-/B, and ENT = JN Temperature Suffix (°F/°C): 135°/57° = A, 155°/68° = B, 175°/79° = D, 200°/93° = E, and 286°/141 ° = G Form No. F_033014 20.10.22 Rev 20.1 Replaces Form F_033014 Rev 19.2 (Revised CE approvals.) Page 2 of 4 ® MICROFAST° QUICK RESPONSE UPRIGHT SPRINKLER VK350 (K8.0) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com For example, sprinkler VK350 with a 1/2" thread, Brass finish and a 155 °F/68 °C temperature rating = Part No. 18259AB Available Finishes And Temperature Ratings: Refer to Table 1. Accessories: (Also refer to the Viking website.) Sprinkler Wrench: Standard Wrench: Part No. 21475M/B (available since 2017) Sprinkler Cabinets: A. Six -head capacity: Part No. 01724A (available since 1971) B. Twelve -head capacity: Part No. 01725A (available since 1971) 4. INSTALLATION Refer to appropriate NFPA Installation Standards. 5. OPERATION During fire conditions, the heat -sensitive liquid in the glass bulb expands, causing the glass to shatter, releasing the pip cap and sealing spring assembly. Water flowing through the sprinkler orifice strikes the sprinkler deflector, forming a uniform spray pattern to extinguish or control the fire. 6. INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND MAINTENANCE Refer to NFPA 25 for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance requirements. 7. AV S See The 8. GUARANTEE For details of warranty, refer to Vikings current r VK350 is available through a network of domestic and international distributors. distributor or contact The Viking Corporation. ftftftftdtly. TABLE 1: AVAILABLE SPRINKLER TEMPERATURE Sprinkler Temperature Sprinkler Nominal RATINGS ANu" Maximum Ambient olor Classification Temperature Rating' Ceiling Temperatur^' 100 °F (38 °C Orange Ordinary 135 °F (57 °C) Ordinary 155 °F (68 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) Red Intermediate 175 °F (79 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Yellow Intermediate 200 °F (93 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Green High 286 °F (141 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) Blue Sprinkler Finishes: Brass, Chrome, White Polyester, Black Polyester, and ENT Corrosion -Resistant Coatings': White Polyester, Black Polyester and ENT. ENT in all temperature ratings except 135 °F (57 °C) Footnotes The sprinkler temperature rating is stamped on the deflector. 2 Based on NFPA-13. Other limits may apply, depending on fire loading, sprinkler location, and other requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Refer to specific installation standards. s The corrosion -resistant coatings have passed the standard corrosion test required by the approving agencies indicated on pages 51 c-e. These tests cannot and do not represent all possible corrosive environments. Prior to installation, verify through the end -user that the coatings are compatible with or suitable for the proposed environment. For automatic sprinklers, the coatings indicated are applied to the exposed exterior surfaces only. Note that the spring is exposed on sprinklers with Polyester, ENT, and PTFE coatings. For ENT coated automatic sprinklers, the waterway is coated. Figure 1: Sprinkler Wrench __, . 2-5/16" Nominal Pipe (59 mm) Engagement 7/16" (11 mm) A Figure 2: Sprinkler Dimensions Form No. F_033014 20.10.22 Rev 20.1 Page 3 of 4 ® MICROFAST° QUICK RESPONSE UPRIGHT SPRINKLER VK350 (K8.0) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Approval Chart 1 (UL) Temperature KEY Microfast° Quick Response Finish A1X4- Escutcheon (ifapplicable) Upright Sprinkler VK350 44 Maximum 175 PSI (12 bar) WWP Base Part SIN Thread Size Nominal K-Factor Overall Length Listings and Approvals' (Refer also to Design Criteria.) Number' NPT BSPT U.S. metricz Inches mm cULus° VdS LPCB CE MED10 China Approval 18257 VK350 3/4" - 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, B2 Al Al B2, B47 131 18278 VK350 - 20 mm 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, B2 Al Al B2, B47 131 182599 VK350 1/2" 15 mm 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, B2 Al -- B2, B47 - 2023711 VK350 - 20 mm 8.0 115.2 1 2-5/16 59 C3 I -- I -- - C3 NOTICE.. Office) 06665E VK350 3/4" 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, B2 Al Al B17 B1 14817 VK350 -- 20 mm 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, B2 Al Al B1' B1 -- 06764139 VK350 1/2" 15 mm 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 A1, B2 Al -- All - -- Approved Temperature Ratings Approved Finishes A- 135 OF (57 °C), 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), 200 OF (93 °C), and 286 OF 1 - Brass, Chrome, White Polyester56, and Black Polyester5,6 (141°C) 2 - ENT5 B - 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), 200 OF (93 °C), and 286 OF (1410C) 3 - Chrome C - 155 OF (68 °C) 4 - Brass, Chrome, White Polyester56, and Black Polyestere,s, and ENT Footnotes 1. Base part number is shown. For complete part number, refer to Viking's current price schedule. 2. Metric K-factor measurement shown is when pressure is measured in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. 3. This table shows the listings and approvals available at the time of printing. Check with the manufacturer for any additional approvals. 4. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in the U.S. and Canada. 5. cULus Listed as corrosion resistant. 6. Other colors are available on request with the same Listings and Approvals as the standard colors. 7. CE: Standard EN 12259-1, Declaration of Performance DOP Sprinklers _LPCB_5-2-19 & DOP_VK350ENT_6-11-19. 8. CE: Standard EN 12259-1, Declaration of Performance DOP Sprinklers_VdS_23-5-13. 9. The 1/2" NPT Large Orifice Sprinkler is listed and approved for retrofit only when installed in accordance with NFPA 13. 10. MED Certified, Standard EN 12259-1, EC -certificate 0832-MED-1003. 11. Approved according to China GB Standard. DESIGN CRITERIA - UL (Also refer to Approval Chart 1) cULus Listing Reguirements: The Microfast® Quick Response Upright Sprinkler VK350 is cULus Listed as indicated in Approval Chart 1 for installation in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 13 for standard spray sprinklers. • Designed for use in Light and Ordinary Hazard occupancies. • The sprinkler installation rules contained in NFPA 13 for standard spray upright sprinklers must be followed. IMPORTANT. Always refer to Bulletin Form No. F_091699 - Care and Handling of Sprinklers. Also refer to Bulletin Form No. F_080614 for general care, installation, and maintenance information. Viking sprinklers are to be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Viking technical data, the appropriate standards of NFPA, LPCB, APSAD, VdS or other similar organiza- tions, and also with the provisions of governmental codes, ordinances, and standards, whenever applicable. Form No. F_033014 20.10.22 Rev 20.1 Page 4 of 4 ® MICROFAST° QUICK RESPONSE UPRIGHT SPRINKLER VK350 (K8.0) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Approval Chart 2 (FM) Microfast° Quick Response Temperature KEY �� Finish RxX Upright Sprinkler VK350 Escutcheon I If applicab Maximum 175 PSI (12 bar) WWP Base Part Thread Size Nominal K-Factor Overall Length FM Approvals' Number' SIN (Refer also to Design Criteria below.) NPT BSPT U.S. metric2 Inches mm 18257 VK350 3/4" -- 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, B2 18278 VK350 -- 20 mm 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, B2 182596 VK350 1/2" -- 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, B2 20237' VK350 -- 20 mm 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 C3 NOTICEOffice) 06665B VK350 3/4" -- 1 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, 132 14817 VK350 20 mm 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, 62 06764136 VK350 1/2" 15 mm 8.0 115.2 2-5/16 59 Al, 132 Approved Temperature Ratings Approved Finishes A- 135 OF (57 °C), 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), 200 OF 1 - Brass, Chrome, White Polyester°, and Black Polyester° (93 °C), and 286 OF (141 °C) 2 - ENT B - 155 OF (68 -C), 175 OF (79 °C), 200 OF (93 °C), and 3 - Chrome 286 OF (141°C) C - 155 OF (68 °C) Footnotes 1. Base part number is shown. For complete part number, refer to Viking's current price schedule. 2. Metric K-factor measurement shown is when pressure is measured in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. 3. This table shows the FM Approvals available at the time of printing. Check with the manufacturer for any additional approvals. 4. Other colors are available on request with the same Approvals as the standard colors. 5. The 1/2" NPT Large Orifice Sprinkler is listed and approved for retrofit only when installed in accordance with NFPA 13. 6. FM approved as corrosion resistant. 7. Approved according to China GB Standard. DESIGN CRITERIA - FM (Also refer to Approval Chart 2 above.) FM Approval Requirements: The Microfast® Quick Response Upright Sprinkler VK350 is FM Approved as a quick response Non -Storage upright sprinkler as indicated in the FM Approval Guide. For specific application and installation requirements, reference the latest applicable FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets (including Data Sheet 2-0). FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheets contain guidelines relating to, but not limited to: minimum water supply requirements, hydraulic design, ceiling slope and obstructions, minimum and maximum allowable spacing, and deflector distance below the ceiling. NOTE: The FM installation guidelines may differ from cULus and/or NFPA criteria. IMPORTANT. Always refer to Bulletin Form No. F_091699 - Care and Handling of Sprinklers. Also refer to Bulletin Form No. F_080614 for general care, installation, and maintenance information. Viking sprinklers are to be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Viking technical data, the appropriate standards of NFPA, FM Global, LPCB, APSAD, VdS or other similar organizations, and also with the provisions of governmental codes, ordinances, and standards, whenever applicable. Form No. F_033014 20.10.22 Rev 20.1 Replaces Form F_033014 Rev 19.2 (Revised CE approvals.) Page 1 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74j] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com SPRINKLERS ARE FRAGILE - HANDLE WITH CARE! General Handling and Storage: • Store sprinklers in a cool, dry place. • Protect sprinklers during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. • Use the original shipping containers. DO NOT place sprinklers loose in boxes, bins, or buckets. • Keep sprinklers separated at all times. DO NOT allow metal parts to contact sprinkler operating elements. For Pre -Assembled Drops: • Protect sprinklers during handling and after installation. • For recessed assemblies, use the protective sprinkler cap (Viking Part Number 10364). Sprinklers with Protective Shields or Caps: • DO NOT remove shields or caps until after sprinkler installation and there no longer is potential for mechanical damage to the sprinkler operating elements. • Sprinkler shields or caps MUST be removed BEFORE placing the system in service! • Remove the sprinkler shield by carefully pulling it apart where it is snapped together. • Remove the cap by turning it slightly and pulling it off the sprinkler. Sprinkler Installation: • DO NOT use the sprinkler deflector or operating element to start or thread the sprinkler into a fitting. • Use only the designated sprinkler head wrench! Refer to the current sprinkler tech- nical data page to determine the correct wrench for the model of sprinkler used. • DO NOT install sprinklers onto piping at the floor level. • Install sprinklers after the piping is in place to prevent mechanical damage. • DO NOT allow impacts such as hammer blows directly to sprinklers or to fittings, pipe, or couplings in close proximity to sprinklers. Sprinklers can be damaged from direct or indirect impacts. • DO NOT attempt to remove drywall, paint, etc., from sprinklers. • Take care not to over -tighten the sprinkler and/or damage its operating parts! Maximum Torque: 1/2" NPT: 14 ft-Ibs. (19.0 N-m) 3/4" NPT: 20 ft-Ibs. (27.1 N-m) 1" NPT. 30 ft-Ibs. (40.7 N-m) CORRECT INCORRECT (Original container used) (Placed loose in box) CORRECT INCORRECT (Protected with caps) (Protective caps not used) CORRECT INCORRECT (Piping is in place at the (Sprinkler at floor level) ceiling) (Special installation (Designated wrench not wrenches) used) WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm- www. P65Warn ings. ca.gov Any sprinkler with a loss of liquid from the glass bulb or damage to the fusible element should be destroyed. Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures exceeding the maximum ambient temperature allowed. Sprinklers that have been painted in the field must be replaced per NFPA 13. Protect sprinklers from paint and paint overspray in accordance with the installation standards. Do not clean sprinklers with soap and water, ammonia, or any other cleaning fluid. Do not use adhesives or solvents on sprinklers or their operating elements. Refer to the appropriate technical data page and NFPA standards for complete care, handling, installation, and maintenance instructions. For additional product and system information Viking data pages and installation instructions are available on the Viking Web site at www.vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Replaces Form No. F_091699 Rev 16.1 (Added P65 Warning) Page 2 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74J] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com PROTECTIVE SPRINKLER SHIELDS AND CAPS General Handling and Storage: Many Viking sprinklers are available with a plastic protective cap or shield temporarily covering the operating elements. The snap - on shields and caps are factory installed and are intended to help protect the operating elements from mechanical damage during shipping, storage, and installation. NOTE: It is still necessary to follow the care and handling instructions on the appropriate sprin- kler technical data sheets* when installing sprinklers with bulb shields or caps. WHEN TO REMOVE THE SHIELDS AND CAPS: NOTE: SHIELDS AND CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! Remove the shield or cap from the sprinkler only after checking all of the following: The sprinkler has been installed'. The wall or ceiling finish work is completed where the sprinkler is installed and there no longer is a potential for mechanical damage to the sprinkler operating elements. SHIELDS AND CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! ply, ' •.�. Figure 1: Sprinkler shield being removed from a pendent sprinkler Figure 2: Sprinkler cap being removed from a pendent sprinkler. Figure 3: Sprinkler cap being re- moved from and upright sprinkler. HOW TO REMOVE SHIELDS AND CAPS: No tools are necessary to remove the shields or caps from sprinklers. DO NOT use any sharp objects to remove them! Take care not to cause mechanical damage to sprinklers when removing the shields or caps. When removing caps from fusible ele- ment sprinklers, use care to prevent dislodging ejector springs or damaging fusible elements. NOTE: Squeezing the sprinkler cap excessively could damage sprinkler fusible elements. • To remove the shield, simply pull the ends of the shield apart where it is snapped together. Refer to Figure 1. • To remove the cap, turn it slightly and pull it off the sprinkler. Refer to Figures 2 and 3. MEMRefer to the current sprinkler technical data page to determine the correct sprinkler wrench for the model of sprinkler used. Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambient temperature allowed. * Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Figure 1: Sprinkler shield being removed from a pendent sprinkler Figure 2: Sprinkler cap being removed from a pendent sprinkler. Figure 3: Sprinkler cap being re- moved from and upright sprinkler. HOW TO REMOVE SHIELDS AND CAPS: No tools are necessary to remove the shields or caps from sprinklers. DO NOT use any sharp objects to remove them! Take care not to cause mechanical damage to sprinklers when removing the shields or caps. When removing caps from fusible ele- ment sprinklers, use care to prevent dislodging ejector springs or damaging fusible elements. NOTE: Squeezing the sprinkler cap excessively could damage sprinkler fusible elements. • To remove the shield, simply pull the ends of the shield apart where it is snapped together. Refer to Figure 1. • To remove the cap, turn it slightly and pull it off the sprinkler. Refer to Figures 2 and 3. MEMRefer to the current sprinkler technical data page to determine the correct sprinkler wrench for the model of sprinkler used. Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambient temperature allowed. * Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Page 3 of 4 U ARE AND HANDLING I KJ N7G*J 0 M OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com ACAUTION CONCEALED COVER ASSEMBLIES ARE FRAGILE! TO ASSURE SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT, HANDLE WITH CARE. Concealed Sprinkler and Adapter Assembly (Protective Cap Removed) Concealed Sprinkler and Adapter Assembly with Protective Cap Cover Plate Assembly (Pendent Cover 12381 shown) GENERAL HANDLING AND STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS: • Do not store in temperatures exceeding 100 °F (38 °C). Avoid direct sunlight and confined areas subject to heat. • Protect sprinklers and cover assemblies during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. Use original shipping containers. Do not place sprinklers or cover assemblies loose in boxes, bins, or buckets. • Keep the sprinkler bodies covered with the protective sprinkler cap any time the sprinklers are shipped or handled, during testing of the system, and while ceiling finish work is being completed. • Use only the designated Viking recessed sprinkler wrench (refer to the appropriate sprinkler data page) to install these sprinklers. NOTE: The protective cap is temporarily removed during installation and then placed back on the sprinkler for protection until finish work is completed. • Do not over -tighten the sprinklers into fittings during installation. • Do not use the sprinkler deflector to start or thread the sprinklers into fittings during installation. • Do not attempt to remove drywall, paint, etc., from the sprinklers. • Remove the plastic protective cap from the sprinkler before attaching the cover plate assembly. PROTECTIVE CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Page 4 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74j] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com USE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING WAX -COATED SPRINKLERS Many of Viking's sprinklers are available with factory -applied wax coating for corrosion resistance. These sprinklers MUST receive appropriate care and handling to avoid damaging the wax coating and to assure satisfactory performance of the product. General Handling and Storage of Wax -Coated Sprinklers: • Store the sprinklers in a cool, dry place (in temperatures below the maximum ambient temperature allowed for the sprinkler temperature rating. Refer to Table 1 below.) • Store containers of wax -coated sprinklers separate from other sprinklers. • Protect the sprinklers during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. • Use original shipping containers. • Do not place sprinklers in loose boxes, bins, or buckets. Installation of Wax -Coated Sprinklers: Use only the special sprinkler head wrench designed for installing wax -coated Viking sprinklers (any other wrench may damage the unit). • Take care not to crack the wax coating on the units. • For touching up the wax coating after installation, wax is available from Viking in bar form. Refer to Table 1 below. The coating MUST be repaired after sprinkler installation to protect the corrosion -resistant properties of the sprinkler. • Use care when locating sprinklers near fixtures that can generate heat. Do not install sprinklers where they would be exposed to temperatures exceed- ing the maximum recommended ambient temperature for the temperature rating used. • Inspect the coated sprinklers frequently soon after installation to verify the integrity of the corrosion resistant coating. Thereafter, inspect representative samples of the coated sprinklers in accordance with NFPA 25. Close up visual inspections are necessary to determine whether the sprinklers are being affected by corrosive conditions. Sprinkler Temperature Rating (Fusing Point) Wax Part Number Wax Melting Point Maximum Ambient Ceiling Temperature Wax Color 155 °F (68 °C) / 165 °F (74 °C) 02568A 148 °F (64 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) Light Brown 175 °F (79 °C) 04146A 161 °F (71 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Brown 200 °F (93 °C) 04146A 161 °F (71 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Brown 220 °F (104 °C) 02569A 170 °F (76 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Dark Brown 286 °F (141 °C) 02569A 170 °F (76 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Dark Brown Based on NFPA-13. Other limits may apply, depending on fire loading, sprinkler location, and other requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Refer to specific installation standards. ©WARNING Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambi- ent temperature allowed. Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Replaces Form No. F_091699 Rev 16.1 (Added P65 Warning) Page 1 of 1 N4 I KJ REGULATORYAND HEALTH WARNINGS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page www.vikinggroupinc.com 1. DESCRIPTION Regulatory and Health Warnings applying to materials used in the manufacture and construction of fire protection products are provided herin as they relate to legally mandated jurisdictional regions. A WARNING STATE OF CALIFORNIA, USA Installing or servicing fire protection products such as sprinklers, valves, piping etc. can expose you to chemicals including, but not li- mited to, lead, nickel, butadiene, titaninum dioxide, chromium, carbon black, and acrylonitrile which are known to the State of California to cause cancer or birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information, go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov 2. WARRANTY TERMS AND CONDITIONS For details of warranty, refer to Viking's current list price schedule at www.vikinggroupinc.com or contact Viking directly. Form No. F 111218 18.11.15 Rev 18.1 New Bulletin Page 1 of 6 ® MICROFAST° QUICK 4 I KjA 0 A A RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLER VK302 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com 1. DESCRIPTION The Viking Microfase Quick Response Pendent Sprinkler VK302 is a small thermosensitive glass bulb spray sprinkler available with various finishes and tem- perature ratings to meet design requirements. The special Polyesterand Electroless Nickel PTFE (ENT) coatings can be used in decorative applications where colors are desired. In addition, these coatings have been investigated for installation in corrosive environments and are Listed and Approved as indicated in the Approval Charts. 2. LISTINGS AND APPROVALS &S cULus Listed: Category VNIV M. FM Approved: Class Series 2000 vds VdS Approved: Certificates G414009, G414010, G4040095, and 4880045 LPC6. LPCl3 Approved: Certificate 096e/06 WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm- www.P65Warnings.ca.gov C E CE: Standard EN 12259-1,Declaration of Performance DOP_Sprinklers_LPCB_5-2-19, DOP VK302ENT 29-1-20 & DOP VK302- 57C 30-9-20 China Approval: Approved according to China GB standard Q MED Certified: Standard EN 12259-1, EC -certificate of conformity 0832-MED-1003 Refer to Approval Chart 1 and Design Criteria cULus Listing requirements, and refer to Approval Chart 2 and Design Criteria for FM Approval requirements that must be followed. 3. TECHNICAL DATA Specifications: Minimum Operating Pressure: 7 psi (0.5 bar) Rated to 175 psi (12 bar) water working pressure Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (34.5 bar) Thread size: 1/2" NPT, 15 mm BSP Nominal K-Factor: 5.6 U.S. (80.6 metric—) Glass -bulb fluid temperature rated to -65 °F (-55 °C) Overall Length: 2-1/4" (58 mm) �Wl_us Listing, FM Approval, and NFPA 13 installs require a minimum of 7 psi (0.5 bar). The minimum operating pressure for LPCB and CE Approvals ONLY is 5 psi (0.35 bar). Material Standards: Frame Casting: Brass UNS-C84400 or QM Brass Deflector: Phosphor Bronze UNS-051000 or Copper UNS-C19500 Bulb: Glass, nominal 3 mm diameter Belleville Spring Sealing Assembly: Nickel Alloy, coated on both sides with PTFE Tape Screw: Brass UNS-C36000 Pip Cap and Insert Assembly: Copper UNS-C11000 and Stainless Steel UNS-S30400 For Polyester Coated Sprinklers: Belleville Spring -Exposed For ENT Coated Sprinklers: Belleville Spring -Exposed, Screw and Pipcap - ENT plated. Ordering Information: (Also refer to the current Viking price list.) Order Quick Response Pendent Sprinklers by first adding the appropriate suffix for the sprinkler finish and then the appropriate suffix for the temperature rating to the sprinkler base part number. Form No. F_033314 20.07.14 Rev 20.1 Replaces Form No. F_033314 Rev 19.3 (Added ENT to CE Approval.) Page 2 of 6 ® MICROFAST° QUICK 4 I KjA 0 A A RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLER VK302 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Finish Suffix: Brass = A, Chrome = F, White Polyester = M-/W, Black Polyester = M-/B, and ENT = JN Temperature Suffix: 135 °F (57 °C) = A, 155 °F (68 °C) = B, 175 °F (79 °C) = D, 200 °F (93 °C) = E, 286 °F (141 °C) = G For example, sprinkler VK302 with a Brass finish and a 155 °F (68 °C) temperature rating = Part No. 12979AB Available Finishes And Temperature Ratings: Refer to Table 1. Accessories: (Also refer to the current Viking price list.) Sprinkler Wrenches: A. Standard Wrench: Part No. 21475M/B. B. Wrench for Recessed Pendent Sprinklers: Part No. 13655W/B** (available since 2006) C. Optional Protective Sprinkler Cap Remover/Escutcheon Installer Tool*** Part No. 15915 (available since 2010) **A %" ratchet is required (not available from Viking). ***Allows use from the floor by attaching a length of 1" diameter CPVC tubing to the tool. Ideal for sprinkler cabinets. Refer to Bulletin F_051808. Sprinkler Cabinets: A. Six -head capacity: Part No. 01724A (available since 1971) B. Twelve -head capacity: Part No. 01725A (available since 1971) 4. INSTALLATION Refer to appropriate NFPA Installation Standards. 5. OPERATION During fire conditions, the heat -sensitive liquid in the glass bulb expands, causing the glass to shatter, releasing the pip cap and sealing spring assembly. Water flowing through the sprinkler orifice strikes the sprinkler deflector, forming a uniform spray pattern to extinguish or control the fire. 6. INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND MAINTENANCE Refer to NFPA 25 for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance requirements. 7. AVAILABILITY The Viking Microfast° Quick Response Pendent Sprinkler VK302 is available through a network of domestic and international dis- tributors. See The Viking Corporation web site for the closest distributor or contact The Viking Corporation. 8. GUARANTEE For details of warranty, refer to Viking's current list price schedule or contact Viking directly. Wrench Flat Protective Sprinkler Cap 21475 • Figure 1: Standard Sprinkler Wrench 21475M/B Form No. F_033314 20.07.14 Rev 20.1 Page 3 of 6 ® MICROFAST° QUICK 4 I KjA 0 A A RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLER VK302 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 il: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data .vikinggroupinc.com Sprinkler Temperature Sprinkler Nominal Classification Temperature Rating' Temperature2 Oulu l.ulur Ordinary 135 °F (57 °C) °C) Orange Ordinary 155 °F (68 °C) 100 °C) Red Intermediate 175 °F (79 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Yellow Intermediate 200 °F (93 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Green High 286 °F (141 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) j Blue Sprinkler Finishes: Brass, Chrome, White Polyester, Black Polyester, and ENT Corrosion -Resistant Coatings3: White Polyester, and Black Polyester. ENT in all temperature ratings except 135 °F (57 °C) Footnotes The sprinkler temperature rating is stamped on the deflector. 2 Based on NFPA-13. Other limits may apply, depending on fire loading, sprinkler location, and other requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Refer to specific installation standards. 3 The corrosion -resistant coatings have passed the standard corrosion test required by the approving agencies indicated in the Approval Charts. These tests cannot and do not represent all possible corrosive environments. Prior to installation, verify through the end -user that the coatings are com- patible with or suitable for the proposed environment. For automatic sprinklers, the coatings indicated are applied to the exposed exterior surfaces only. Note that the spring is exposed on sprinklers with Polyester and ENT coatings. For ENT coated automatic sprinklers, the waterway is coated. Sprinkler wrench 13655W/B** for recessed pendent sprinklers ** A 1/2" ratchet is required (not available from Viking) yy! l! ' F 1 }� c y'� Carefully slide the wrench sideways around the protective cap, ensuring engagement with the sprinkler wrench flats Figure 2: Wrench 13655W/13 for Recessed Pendent Sprinklers Form No. F_033314 20.07.14 Rev 20.1 Page 4 of 6 ® MICROFAST° QUICK A A A RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLER VK302 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Approval Chart 1 (UL) Temperature KEY The Viking Microfast Quick Response Finish Pendent Sprinkler VK302 AlXF Escutcheon (if applicable) 44 Maximum 175 PSI (12 Bar) WWP Base Thread Size Nominal Overall Listings and Approvals' Part SIN Sprinkler K-Factor Length (Refer also to Design Criteria.) Style Number NPT BSP U.S. metric' Inches mm cULus4 VdS LPCB CE7 MEDI China Approval 12979 VK302 Pendent 1/2" 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-1/4 58 A1Z, B1Y, D2, C2X Al A1Z, B1Y D1Z, C1Y, D2, D1 A1Z, B1Y 213541 VK302 Pendent 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-1/4 58 D3 D3 NOTICEOffice) 06662B VK302 Pendent 1/2" 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-1/4 58 A1Z, B1Y, D2, C2X -- I-- - 18021 VK302 Pendent 1/2" 115 mm 5.6 80.6 1 2-1/4 58 A1Z, B1Y Al A1Z, BlY I D1Z, C1Y, D2 D1 Approved Temperature Ratings Approved Finishes Approved Escutcheons A- 135 -F (57 -C), 155 -F (68 -C), 175 -F 1 - Brass, Chrome, White X - Standard surface -mounted escutcheon or the (79 °C), 200 °F (93 °C), 286 °F (141 °C) Polyester's, Black Polyes- Viking Micromatic® Model E-1 Recessed Escutcheon B - 135 -F (57 -C), 155 -F (68 -C), 175 -F ter5.6 Y - Standard surface -mounted escutcheon or recessed with the Viking Micromatic° (79 °C), and 200 °F (93 °C) 2 - ENT' Model E-1, E-2, or E-3 Recessed Escutcheon C - 155 -F (68 -C), 175 °F (79 °C), and 3 - Chrome Z - Standard surface -mounted escutcheon 200 -F (93 -C) D - 155 °F (68 °C), 175 °F (79 °C), 200 -F (93 -C), 286 -F (141 -C) Footnotes 1 Base part number shown. For complete part number, refer to Viking's current price schedule. ' Metric K-factor measurement shown is when pressure is measured in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. ' This table shows the listings and approvals available at the time of printing. Other approvals may be in process. 4 Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in the U.S. and Canada. 5 cULus Listed as corrosion -resistant. 6 Other colors are available on request with the same Listings and Approvals as the standard colors. 7 CE: Standard EN 12259-1,Declaration of Performance DOP_Sprinklers_LPCB_5-2-19, DOP_VK302ENT_29-1-20 & DOP_VK302-57C_30-9-20. a MED Certified, Standard EN 12259-1, EC-0832-MED-1003. e Approved according to China GB Standard. DESIGN CRITERIA - UL (Also refer to Approval Chart 1 above.) cULus Listing Reguirements: The Viking Microfast® Quick Response Pendent Sprinkler VK302 is cULus Listed as indicated in the Approval Chart for installation in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 13 for standard spray sprinklers. • Designed for use in Light and Ordinary occupancies. • The sprinkler installation rules contained in NFPA 13 for standard spray pendent sprinklers must be followed. IMPORTANT: Always refer to Bulletin Form No. F_091699 - Care and Handling of Sprinklers. Also refer to Form No. F_080614 for general care, installation, and maintenance information. Viking sprinklers are to be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Viking technical data, the appropriate standards of NFPA, LPCB, APSAD, VdS or other similar organizations, and also with the provisions of governmental codes, ordinances, and standards, whenever applicable. Form No. F_033314 20.07.14 Rev 20.1 Page 5 of 6 ® MICROFAST° QUICK 4 I KjA 0 A A RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLER VK302 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Approval Chart 2 (FM) Temperature KEY The Viking Microfast° Quick Response Finish Pendent Sprinkler VK302 A1X4- Escutcheon (ifapplicable) Maximum 175 PSI (12 Bar) WWP Base Part Sprinkler Thread Size Nominal K-Factor Overall Length FM Approvals3 Number' SIN Style (Refer also to Design Criteria.) NPT BSP U.S. metricz Inches mm 12979 VK302 Pendent 1/2" 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-1/4 58 A1Z, B1Y, D2X, C2 21354' VK302 Pendent -- 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-1/4 58 C3 NOTICE.. Office) 06662B VK302 Pendent 1/2" 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-1/4 58 A1Z, B1Y, D2X, C2 18021 VK302 Pendent 1/2" 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-1/4 58 A1Z, B1Y Approved Temperature Ratings Approved Escutcheons A- 135 OF (57 °C), 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), 200 OF Approved Finishes X - Standard surface -mounted escutcheon or the (93 °C), 286 OF (141 °C) OF °C), OF °C), OF °C), 1 - Brass, Chrome, White Polyester", Viking Micromatic® Model E-1 Recessed Escutcheon B - 135 (57 155 (68 175 (79 and and Black Polyester' Y - Standard surface -mounted escutcheon or recessed 200 OF (93 °C) OF °C), OF °C), OF °C), 2 - ENT5 with the Viking Micromatic° Model E-1 or E-2 C - 155 (68 175 (79 200 (93 286 3 - Chrome Recessed Escutcheon OF (141 °C) Z - Standard surface -mounted escutcheon D - 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), 200 OF (93 °C) Footnotes Base part number shown. For complete part number, refer to Viking's current price schedule. z Metric K-factor measurement shown is when pressure is measured in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. 3 This table shows the FM Approvals available at the time of printing. Other approvals may be in process. 4 Other colors are available on request with the same Approvals as the standard colors. 5 FM approved as corrosion resistant. 5 Approved according to China GB Standard. DESIGN CRITERIA - FM (Also refer to Approval Chart 2 above.) FM Approval Reauirements: The Viking Microfast® Quick Response Pendent Sprinkler VK302 is FM Approved as quick response Non -storage pendent sprinklers as indicated in the FM Approval Guide. For specific application and installation requirements, reference the latest applicable FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets (including Data Sheet 2-0). FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheets contain guidelines relating to, but not limited to: minimum water supply requirements, hydraulic design, ceiling slope and obstructions, minimum and maximum allowable spacing, and deflector distance below the ceiling. NOTE: The FM installation guidelines may differ from cULus and/or NFPA criteria. IMPORTANT: Always refer to Bulletin Form No. F_091699 - Care and Handling of Sprinklers. Also refer to Form No. F_080614 for general care, installation, and maintenance information. Viking sprinklers are to be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Viking technical data, the appropriate standards of NFPA, FM Global, LPCB, APSAD, VdS or other similar organiza- tions, and also with the provisions of governmental codes, ordinances, and standards, whenever applicable. Form No. F_033314 20.07.14 Rev 20.1 Page 6 of 6 ® ST@ QUICK N4 I Ki�� RES ENDENT SPRINKL 02 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingco Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Ceiling Opening Size: 2-5/16" (59 mm) minimum 1/2" 2-1/2" (64 mm) maximum (15 mm) NPT . • i �i71 ;j �} ? it �!• - Nn T 2-1/4" xn . (45 mm) Installed with a standard 1/8" surface -mounted escutcheon Figure 3: Sprinkler Dimensions with a Standard Escutcheon It 2-1/8"� (54 mm) 1 1-3/4" (45 mm) Max. Installed with a Model E-1 Recessed Escutcheon A 1-1 /8" (29 mm) 2"" Min. (51 mm) Max. r 2-1/8" (54 mm) i� Installed with a Model E-2 Thread -on Recessed Escutcheon Ceiling Opening Size: 2-5/16" (59 mm) minimum 2-1/2" (64 mm) maximum 1-1 /8" (29 mm) Min. Figure 4: Sprinkler Dimensions with the Model E-1 and E-2 Recessed Escutcheons Form No. F_033314 20.07.14 Rev 20.1 Replaces Form No. F_033314 Rev 19.3 (Added ENT to CE Approval.) Page 1 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74j] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com SPRINKLERS ARE FRAGILE - HANDLE WITH CARE! General Handling and Storage: • Store sprinklers in a cool, dry place. • Protect sprinklers during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. • Use the original shipping containers. DO NOT place sprinklers loose in boxes, bins, or buckets. • Keep sprinklers separated at all times. DO NOT allow metal parts to contact sprinkler operating elements. For Pre -Assembled Drops: • Protect sprinklers during handling and after installation. • For recessed assemblies, use the protective sprinkler cap (Viking Part Number 10364). Sprinklers with Protective Shields or Caps: • DO NOT remove shields or caps until after sprinkler installation and there no longer is potential for mechanical damage to the sprinkler operating elements. • Sprinkler shields or caps MUST be removed BEFORE placing the system in service! • Remove the sprinkler shield by carefully pulling it apart where it is snapped together. • Remove the cap by turning it slightly and pulling it off the sprinkler. Sprinkler Installation: • DO NOT use the sprinkler deflector or operating element to start or thread the sprinkler into a fitting. • Use only the designated sprinkler head wrench! Refer to the current sprinkler tech- nical data page to determine the correct wrench for the model of sprinkler used. • DO NOT install sprinklers onto piping at the floor level. • Install sprinklers after the piping is in place to prevent mechanical damage. • DO NOT allow impacts such as hammer blows directly to sprinklers or to fittings, pipe, or couplings in close proximity to sprinklers. Sprinklers can be damaged from direct or indirect impacts. • DO NOT attempt to remove drywall, paint, etc., from sprinklers. • Take care not to over -tighten the sprinkler and/or damage its operating parts! Maximum Torque: 1/2" NPT: 14 ft-Ibs. (19.0 N-m) 3/4" NPT: 20 ft-Ibs. (27.1 N-m) 1" NPT. 30 ft-Ibs. (40.7 N-m) CORRECT INCORRECT (Original container used) (Placed loose in box) CORRECT INCORRECT (Protected with caps) (Protective caps not used) CORRECT INCORRECT (Piping is in place at the (Sprinkler at floor level) ceiling) (Special installation (Designated wrench not wrenches) used) WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm- www. P65Warn ings. ca.gov Any sprinkler with a loss of liquid from the glass bulb or damage to the fusible element should be destroyed. Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures exceeding the maximum ambient temperature allowed. Sprinklers that have been painted in the field must be replaced per NFPA 13. Protect sprinklers from paint and paint overspray in accordance with the installation standards. Do not clean sprinklers with soap and water, ammonia, or any other cleaning fluid. Do not use adhesives or solvents on sprinklers or their operating elements. Refer to the appropriate technical data page and NFPA standards for complete care, handling, installation, and maintenance instructions. For additional product and system information Viking data pages and installation instructions are available on the Viking Web site at www.vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Replaces Form No. F_091699 Rev 16.1 (Added P65 Warning) Page 2 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74J] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com PROTECTIVE SPRINKLER SHIELDS AND CAPS General Handling and Storage: Many Viking sprinklers are available with a plastic protective cap or shield temporarily covering the operating elements. The snap - on shields and caps are factory installed and are intended to help protect the operating elements from mechanical damage during shipping, storage, and installation. NOTE: It is still necessary to follow the care and handling instructions on the appropriate sprin- kler technical data sheets* when installing sprinklers with bulb shields or caps. WHEN TO REMOVE THE SHIELDS AND CAPS: NOTE: SHIELDS AND CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! Remove the shield or cap from the sprinkler only after checking all of the following: The sprinkler has been installed'. The wall or ceiling finish work is completed where the sprinkler is installed and there no longer is a potential for mechanical damage to the sprinkler operating elements. SHIELDS AND CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! ply, ' •.�. Figure 1: Sprinkler shield being removed from a pendent sprinkler Figure 2: Sprinkler cap being removed from a pendent sprinkler. Figure 3: Sprinkler cap being re- moved from and upright sprinkler. HOW TO REMOVE SHIELDS AND CAPS: No tools are necessary to remove the shields or caps from sprinklers. DO NOT use any sharp objects to remove them! Take care not to cause mechanical damage to sprinklers when removing the shields or caps. When removing caps from fusible ele- ment sprinklers, use care to prevent dislodging ejector springs or damaging fusible elements. NOTE: Squeezing the sprinkler cap excessively could damage sprinkler fusible elements. • To remove the shield, simply pull the ends of the shield apart where it is snapped together. Refer to Figure 1. • To remove the cap, turn it slightly and pull it off the sprinkler. Refer to Figures 2 and 3. MEMRefer to the current sprinkler technical data page to determine the correct sprinkler wrench for the model of sprinkler used. ©WARNING Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambient temperature allowed. * Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Figure 1: Sprinkler shield being removed from a pendent sprinkler Figure 2: Sprinkler cap being removed from a pendent sprinkler. Figure 3: Sprinkler cap being re- moved from and upright sprinkler. HOW TO REMOVE SHIELDS AND CAPS: No tools are necessary to remove the shields or caps from sprinklers. DO NOT use any sharp objects to remove them! Take care not to cause mechanical damage to sprinklers when removing the shields or caps. When removing caps from fusible ele- ment sprinklers, use care to prevent dislodging ejector springs or damaging fusible elements. NOTE: Squeezing the sprinkler cap excessively could damage sprinkler fusible elements. • To remove the shield, simply pull the ends of the shield apart where it is snapped together. Refer to Figure 1. • To remove the cap, turn it slightly and pull it off the sprinkler. Refer to Figures 2 and 3. MEMRefer to the current sprinkler technical data page to determine the correct sprinkler wrench for the model of sprinkler used. ©WARNING Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambient temperature allowed. * Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Page 3 of 4 U ARE AND HANDLING I KJ N7G*J 0 M OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com ACAUTION CONCEALED COVER ASSEMBLIES ARE FRAGILE! TO ASSURE SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT, HANDLE WITH CARE. Concealed Sprinkler and Adapter Assembly (Protective Cap Removed) Concealed Sprinkler and Adapter Assembly with Protective Cap Cover Plate Assembly (Pendent Cover 12381 shown) GENERAL HANDLING AND STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS: • Do not store in temperatures exceeding 100 °F (38 °C). Avoid direct sunlight and confined areas subject to heat. • Protect sprinklers and cover assemblies during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. Use original shipping containers. Do not place sprinklers or cover assemblies loose in boxes, bins, or buckets. • Keep the sprinkler bodies covered with the protective sprinkler cap any time the sprinklers are shipped or handled, during testing of the system, and while ceiling finish work is being completed. • Use only the designated Viking recessed sprinkler wrench (refer to the appropriate sprinkler data page) to install these sprinklers. NOTE: The protective cap is temporarily removed during installation and then placed back on the sprinkler for protection until finish work is completed. • Do not over -tighten the sprinklers into fittings during installation. • Do not use the sprinkler deflector to start or thread the sprinklers into fittings during installation. • Do not attempt to remove drywall, paint, etc., from the sprinklers. • Remove the plastic protective cap from the sprinkler before attaching the cover plate assembly. PROTECTIVE CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Page 4 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74j] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com USE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING WAX -COATED SPRINKLERS Many of Viking's sprinklers are available with factory -applied wax coating for corrosion resistance. These sprinklers MUST receive appropriate care and handling to avoid damaging the wax coating and to assure satisfactory performance of the product. General Handling and Storage of Wax -Coated Sprinklers: • Store the sprinklers in a cool, dry place (in temperatures below the maximum ambient temperature allowed for the sprinkler temperature rating. Refer to Table 1 below.) • Store containers of wax -coated sprinklers separate from other sprinklers. • Protect the sprinklers during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. • Use original shipping containers. • Do not place sprinklers in loose boxes, bins, or buckets. Installation of Wax -Coated Sprinklers: Use only the special sprinkler head wrench designed for installing wax -coated Viking sprinklers (any other wrench may damage the unit). • Take care not to crack the wax coating on the units. • For touching up the wax coating after installation, wax is available from Viking in bar form. Refer to Table 1 below. The coating MUST be repaired after sprinkler installation to protect the corrosion -resistant properties of the sprinkler. • Use care when locating sprinklers near fixtures that can generate heat. Do not install sprinklers where they would be exposed to temperatures exceed- ing the maximum recommended ambient temperature for the temperature rating used. • Inspect the coated sprinklers frequently soon after installation to verify the integrity of the corrosion resistant coating. Thereafter, inspect representative samples of the coated sprinklers in accordance with NFPA 25. Close up visual inspections are necessary to determine whether the sprinklers are being affected by corrosive conditions. Sprinkler Temperature Rating (Fusing Point) Wax Part Number Wax Melting Point Maximum Ambient Ceiling Temperature Wax Color 155 °F (68 °C) / 165 °F (74 °C) 02568A 148 °F (64 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) Light Brown 175 °F (79 °C) 04146A 161 °F (71 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Brown 200 °F (93 °C) 04146A 161 °F (71 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Brown 220 °F (104 °C) 02569A 170 °F (76 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Dark Brown 286 °F (141 °C) 02569A 170 °F (76 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Dark Brown Based on NFPA-13. Other limits may apply, depending on fire loading, sprinkler location, and other requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Refer to specific installation standards. ©WARNING Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambi- ent temperature allowed. Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Replaces Form No. F_091699 Rev 16.1 (Added P65 Warning) Page 1 of 1 N4 I KJ REGULATORYAND HEALTH WARNINGS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page www.vikinggroupinc.com 1. DESCRIPTION Regulatory and Health Warnings applying to materials used in the manufacture and construction of fire protection products are provided herin as they relate to legally mandated jurisdictional regions. A WARNING STATE OF CALIFORNIA, USA Installing or servicing fire protection products such as sprinklers, valves, piping etc. can expose you to chemicals including, but not li- mited to, lead, nickel, butadiene, titaninum dioxide, chromium, carbon black, and acrylonitrile which are known to the State of California to cause cancer or birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information, go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov 2. WARRANTY TERMS AND CONDITIONS For details of warranty, refer to Viking's current list price schedule at www.vikinggroupinc.com or contact Viking directly. Form No. F 111218 18.11.15 Rev 18.1 New Bulletin Page 1 of 6 MICROFAST@ QUICK i NA A 7RSESPONSE HORIZONTAL IDEWALL SPRINKLER I KJ N7G7* 10VK305 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com DESCRIPTION The Viking Microfast@ Quick Response Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler VK305 is a small thermosensitive glass bulb spray sprinkler available with various finishes and temperature ratings to meet design requirements. The special Polyester and Electroless Nickel PTFE (ENT) coatings can be used in decorative applications where colors are desired. In addition, these coatings have been investigated for installation in corrosive atmospheres and are listed/approved as corrosion resistant as indicated in Approval Charts. 2. LISTINGS AND APPROVALS c qus cULus Listed: Category VNIV <FM> FM Approved: Class 2020 China Approval: Approved according to China GB Standard Refer to Approval Charts and Design Criteria for listing and approval requirements that must be followed. 3. TECHNICAL DATA Specifications: Minimum Operating Pressure: 7 psi (0.5 bar) Rated to 175 psi (12 bar) water working pressure Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (34.5 bar) Nominal K-Factor: 5.6 U.S. (80.6 metric*) " Metric K-factor measurement shown is when pressure is measured in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. Overall Length: 2-3/4" (68 mm) WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm- www.P65Warnings.ca.gov Material Standards: Frame Casting: Brass UNS-C84400 or QM Brass Deflector: Copper UNS-C19500 Bulb: Glass, nominal 3 mm diameter Belleville Spring Sealing Assembly: Nickel Alloy, coated on both sides with PTFE Tape Screw: Brass UNS-C36000 Pip Cap and Insert Assembly: Copper UNS-C11000 and Stainless Steel UNS-S30400 For Polyester Coated Sprinklers: Belleville Spring -Exposed For ENT Coated Sprinklers: Belleville Spring - Exposed, Screw and Pip cap - ENT plated. Ordering Information: (Also refer to the current Viking price list.) Order Viking Microfast@ Quick Response Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler VK305 by first adding the appropriate suffix for the sprin- kler finish and then the appropriate suffix for the temperature rating to the sprinkler base part number. Finish Suffix: Brass = A, Chrome = F, White Polyester = M-/W, Black Polyester = M-/B, and ENT = JN Temperature Suffix: 135 °F / 57 °C = A, 155 °F / 68 °C = B, 175 °F / 79 °C = D, 200 °F / 93 °C = E, and 286 °F / 141 °C = G For example, sprinkler 12997 with a Brass finish and a 155 °F / 68 °C temperature rating = Part No. 12997AB Available Finishes And Temperature Ratings: Refer to Table 1. Accessories: (Also refer to the Viking website.) Sprinkler Wrenches: A. Standard Wrench: Part No. 21475M/B (available since 2017). B. Wrench for recessed and/or wax coated sprinklers: Part No. 13655W/B** (available since 2006) **A'/i' ratchet is required (not available from Viking). Form No. F_060914 19.11.21 Rev 19.2 Replaces form F_060914 Rev. 19.1 (Revised China approval.) Page 2 of 6 MICROFAST@ QUICK i NA A 7RSESPONSE HORIZONTAL IDEWALL SPRINKLER I KJ N7G7* INVK305 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Sprinkler Cabinets: A. Six -head capacity: Part No. 01724A (available since 1971) B. Twelve -head capacity: Part No. 01725A (available since 1971) 4. INSTALLATION Refer to appropriate NFPA Installation Standards. 5. OPERATION During fire conditions, the heat -sensitive fusible link disengages, the pip cap and spring are released, and the waterway is opened. Water flowing through the sprinkler orifice strikes the sprinkler deflector, forming a uniform spray pattern to extinguish or control the fire. 6. INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND MAINTENANCE Refer to NFPA 25 for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance requirements. 7. AVAILABILITY Viking Microfast@ Quick Response Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler VK305 is available through a network of domestic and interna- tional distributors. See The Viking Corporation web site for the closest distributor or contact The Viking Corporation. 8. GUARANTEE For details of warranty, refer to Viking's current list price schedule or contact Viking directly. Wrench Flat • Figure 1: Standard Sprinkler Wrench 21475M/B Form No. F_060914 19.11.21 Rev 19.2 Page 3 of 6 MICROFAST@ QUICK i NA A 7RSESPONSE HORIZONTAL IDEWALL SPRINKLER I KJ N7G7* INVK305 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcor Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.0 Sprinkler Temperature Sprinkler Nominal Maximum Ambient Color Il Classification Temperature Rating' Ceiling Temperature Ordinary 135 °F (57 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) Ordinary 155 °F (68 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) Re Intermediate 175 °F (79 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Yellow Intermediate 200 °F (93 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Green High 286 °F (141 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) Blue Sprinkler Finishes: Brass, Chrome, White Polyester, Black Polyester, and ENT Corrosion -Resistant Coatings3: White Polyester, Black Polyester, and ENT Footnotes The sprinkler temperature rating is stamped on the deflector. 2 Based on NFPA-13. Other limits may apply, depending on fire loading, sprinkler location, and other requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Refer to specific installation standards. s The corrosion -resistant coatings have passed the standard corrosion test required by the approving agencies indicated in the Approval Charts. These tests cannot and do not represent all possible corrosive environments. Prior to installation, verify through the end -user that the coatings are compat- ible with or suitable for the proposed environment. For automatic sprinklers, the coatings indicated are applied to the exposed exterior surfaces only. For ENT coated sprinklers, the waterway is coated. Note that the spring is exposed on sprinklers with Polyester, and ENT coatings. Step 1: Carefully slide the wrench sideways around the deflector, ensuring en- gagement with the sprinkler wrench flats. Sprinkler wrench 13655W/B** must be used for installing wax coated sprinklers. ** A 1/2" ratchet is required Step 2: Carefully press the wrench onto the (not available from Viking) sprinkler wrench flats. Figure 2: Wrench 13655W/B for Recessed Sprinklers Form No. F_060914 19.11.21 Rev 19.2 Page 4 of 6 MICROFAST@ QUICK i NA A 7RSESPONSE HORIZONTAL IDEWALL SPRINKLER I KJ N7G7* INVK305 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Approval Chart 1 (UL) Temperature Finish Microfast® Quick Response Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler VK305 A1X� Escutc For Light or Ordinary Hazard Occupancies Maximum 175 PSI (12 Bar) WWP Deflector must be located 4" to 12" (102 mm to 305 mm) below the ceiling. Sprinkler Thread Size Nominal K-Factor Overall Length Listings and Approvals3 Base Part SIN (Refer also to UL Design Criteria.) Number' NPT BSPT U.S. metric2 Inches mm cULus° China Approval 12997 VK305 1/2" 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-11/16 68 A1W, B1X, C2W, D2Z -- 19782' VK305 1/2" -- 5.6 80.6 1 2-11/16 68 1 E3 E3 NOTICEOffice) 12121 1 VK305 1/2" 1 15 mm 1 5.6 80.6 1 2-11/16 1 68 A1W, B1X, C2W, D2Z -- Approved Temperature Ratings A- 135 OF (57 °C), 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), Approved Escutcheons 200 OF (93 °C), and 286 OF (141 °C) Approved Finishes W - Installed with standard surface -mounted escutcheons B - 135 OF (57 °C), 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), 1 - Brass, Chrome, White Poly -ester"" X - Installed with standard surface -mounted escutch- and 200 OF (93 °C) and Black Polyestere,6 eons or recessed with the Viking Micromatic® Model C - 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), 200 OF (93 °C), 2 - ENT' E-1, E-2, or G-1 Recessed Escutcheon and 286 OF (141 °C) Z - Installed with standard surface -mounted escutch- D - 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), and 200 OF 3 - Chrome eons or recessed with the Viking Micromatic Model (93 OC) E-1 E - 155 OF (68 °C) Footnotes Base part number shown. For complete part number, refer to Viking's current price schedule. 2 Metric K-factor measurement shown is when pressure is measured in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. 'This table shows the listings and approvals available at the time of printing. Other approvals may be in process. ° Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in the U.S. and Canada. ScULus Listed as corrosion -resistant. 6 Other colors are available on request with the same Listings and Approvals as the standard colors. ' Approved according to China GB Standard. DESIGN CRITERIA - UL (Also refer to Approval Chart 1.) cULus Listing Reauirements: Quick Response Horizontal Sprinkler VK305 is cULus Listed as indicated in Approval Chart 1 for installation in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 13 for sidewall standard spray sprinklers. • Designed for use in Light and Ordinary Hazard occupancies. • Locate with the deflector 4" to 12" (102 mm to 305 mm) below the ceiling. • Protection areas and maximum spacing shall be in accordance with the tables provided in NFPA 13. • Minimum spacing allowed is 6 ft. (1.8 m). • Align the top of the deflector parallel with the ceiling. • Locate no less than 4" (102 mm) from end walls. • Maximum distance from end walls shall be no more than one-half of the allowable distance between sprinklers. The distance shall be measured perpendicular to the wall. • The sprinkler installation and obstruction rules contained in NFPA 13 for sidewall standard spray sprinklers must be followed. IMPORTANT. Always refer to Bulletin Form No. F_091699 - Care and Handling of Sprinklers. Also refer to Bulletin Form No. F_080614 for general care, installation, and maintenance information. Viking sprinklers are to be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Viking technical data, the appropriate standards of NFPA, LPCB, APSAD, VdS or other similar organiza- tions, and also with the provisions of governmental codes, ordinances, and standards, whenever applicable. Form No. F_060914 19.11.21 Rev 19.2 Page 5 of 6 MICROFAST@ QUICK i NA A 7RSESPONSE HORIZONTAL IDEWALL SPRINKLER I KJ N7G7* INVK305 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com Temperature KEY Approval Chart 1 (FM) ♦+ Finish A1X F Escutcheon (if applicable) Microfast® Quick Response Sidewall Sprinklers Maximum 175 PSI WWP Sprinkler Thread Size Nominal K-Factor Overall Length FM Approvals3,4 Base Part SIN NPT BSPT U.S. metrW Inches mm Number' (Refer also to Design Criteria below.) 12997 VK305 1/2" 15 mm 5.6 1 80.6 2-11/16 68 A1Y, B1X NOTICEOffice) 12121 1 VK305 1/2" 1 15 mm 1 5.6 80.6 1 2-11/16 1 68 A1W, B1X, C2W, D2Z -- Approved Temperature Ratings Approved Escutcheons X - Installed with standard surface -mounted escutch- A - 135 OF (57 °C), 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 Approved Finishes eons or recessed with the Viking Micromatic® Model °C), 200 OF (93 °C), and 286 OF (141 °C) 1 - Brass E-1, E-2, E-3, or G-1 Recessed Escutcheon B - 135 OF (57 °C), 155 OF (68 °C), 175 OF (79 °C), Y - Installed with standard surface -mounted escutch- and 200 OF (93 °C) eons Footnotes Base part number shown. For complete part number, refer to Viking's current price schedule. 'Metric K-factor measurement shown is when pressure is measured in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. 'This table shows the FM Approvals available at the time of printing. Other approvals may be in process. 4 Viking vertical sidewall sprinklers may be installed pendent or upright. 5 Approved according to China GB Standard. DESIGN CRITERIA - FM (Also refer to Approval Chart 2 above.) FM Approval Reauirements: Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler VK305 is FM Approved as a quick response Non -Storage sidewall sprinkler as indicated in the FM Approval Guide. For specific application and installation requirements, reference the latest applicable FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets (including Data Sheet 2-0). FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheets contain guidelines relating to, but not limited to: minimum water supply requirements, hydraulic design, ceiling slope and obstructions, minimum and maximum allowable spacing, and deflector distance below the ceiling. NOTE: The FM installation guidelines may differ from cULus and/or NFPA criteria. IMPORTANT: Always refer to Bulletin Form No. F_091699 - Care and Handling of Sprinklers. Also refer to Bulletin Form No. F_080614 for general care, installation, and maintenance information. Viking sprinklers are to be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Viking technical data, the appropriate standards of NFPA, FM Global, LPCB, APSAD, VdS or other similar organizations, and also with the provisions of governmental codes, ordinances, and standards, whenever applicable. Form No. F_060914 19.11.21 Rev 19.2 Page 6 of 6 MICROFAST@ QUICK i NA A 7RSESPONSE HORIZONTAL IDEWALL SPRINKLER I KJ N7G7* INVK305 (K5.6) The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page: www.vikinggroupinc.com 2-3/4" (68 mm) 2-7/16" -No- (62 mm) Wall Opening Size: Installed with a Standard 2-5/16" (58.7 mm) minimum 1/8" Surface -Mounted 2-1/2" (63.5 mm) maximum Escutcheon Figure 3: Sidewall Sprinkler Dimensions with a Standard Escutcheon Minimum Minimum 1-5/8" 1-3/4" 04 (41 mm) (45 mm) 2-1/8" r D (54 mm) ` (54 mm) 'ti M 2-1/4" 2-5/8" (57 mm) (67 mm) Maximum Maximum Wall Opening Size: Installed with the Installed with the 2-5/16" (58.7 mm) minimum Micromatic Model E-1 Threaded Model E-2 2-1/2" (63.5 mm) maximum Recessed Escutcheon Recessed Escutcheon Figure 4: Sidewall Sprinkler VK305 Dimensions with the Model E-1 and E-2 Recessed Escutcheons Form No. F_060914 19.11.21 Rev 19.2 Replaces form F_060914 Rev. 19.1 (Revised China approval.) Page 1 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74j] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com SPRINKLERS ARE FRAGILE - HANDLE WITH CARE! General Handling and Storage: • Store sprinklers in a cool, dry place. • Protect sprinklers during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. • Use the original shipping containers. DO NOT place sprinklers loose in boxes, bins, or buckets. • Keep sprinklers separated at all times. DO NOT allow metal parts to contact sprinkler operating elements. For Pre -Assembled Drops: • Protect sprinklers during handling and after installation. • For recessed assemblies, use the protective sprinkler cap (Viking Part Number 10364). Sprinklers with Protective Shields or Caps: • DO NOT remove shields or caps until after sprinkler installation and there no longer is potential for mechanical damage to the sprinkler operating elements. • Sprinkler shields or caps MUST be removed BEFORE placing the system in service! • Remove the sprinkler shield by carefully pulling it apart where it is snapped together. • Remove the cap by turning it slightly and pulling it off the sprinkler. Sprinkler Installation: • DO NOT use the sprinkler deflector or operating element to start or thread the sprinkler into a fitting. • Use only the designated sprinkler head wrench! Refer to the current sprinkler tech- nical data page to determine the correct wrench for the model of sprinkler used. • DO NOT install sprinklers onto piping at the floor level. • Install sprinklers after the piping is in place to prevent mechanical damage. • DO NOT allow impacts such as hammer blows directly to sprinklers or to fittings, pipe, or couplings in close proximity to sprinklers. Sprinklers can be damaged from direct or indirect impacts. • DO NOT attempt to remove drywall, paint, etc., from sprinklers. • Take care not to over -tighten the sprinkler and/or damage its operating parts! Maximum Torque: 1/2" NPT: 14 ft-Ibs. (19.0 N-m) 3/4" NPT: 20 ft-Ibs. (27.1 N-m) 1" NPT. 30 ft-Ibs. (40.7 N-m) CORRECT INCORRECT (Original container used) (Placed loose in box) CORRECT INCORRECT (Protected with caps) (Protective caps not used) CORRECT INCORRECT (Piping is in place at the (Sprinkler at floor level) ceiling) (Special installation (Designated wrench not wrenches) used) WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm- www. P65Warn ings. ca.gov Any sprinkler with a loss of liquid from the glass bulb or damage to the fusible element should be destroyed. Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures exceeding the maximum ambient temperature allowed. Sprinklers that have been painted in the field must be replaced per NFPA 13. Protect sprinklers from paint and paint overspray in accordance with the installation standards. Do not clean sprinklers with soap and water, ammonia, or any other cleaning fluid. Do not use adhesives or solvents on sprinklers or their operating elements. Refer to the appropriate technical data page and NFPA standards for complete care, handling, installation, and maintenance instructions. For additional product and system information Viking data pages and installation instructions are available on the Viking Web site at www.vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Replaces Form No. F_091699 Rev 16.1 (Added P65 Warning) Page 2 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74J] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com PROTECTIVE SPRINKLER SHIELDS AND CAPS General Handling and Storage: Many Viking sprinklers are available with a plastic protective cap or shield temporarily covering the operating elements. The snap - on shields and caps are factory installed and are intended to help protect the operating elements from mechanical damage during shipping, storage, and installation. NOTE: It is still necessary to follow the care and handling instructions on the appropriate sprin- kler technical data sheets* when installing sprinklers with bulb shields or caps. WHEN TO REMOVE THE SHIELDS AND CAPS: NOTE: SHIELDS AND CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! Remove the shield or cap from the sprinkler only after checking all of the following: The sprinkler has been installed'. The wall or ceiling finish work is completed where the sprinkler is installed and there no longer is a potential for mechanical damage to the sprinkler operating elements. SHIELDS AND CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! ply, ' •.�. Figure 1: Sprinkler shield being removed from a pendent sprinkler Figure 2: Sprinkler cap being removed from a pendent sprinkler. Figure 3: Sprinkler cap being re- moved from and upright sprinkler. HOW TO REMOVE SHIELDS AND CAPS: No tools are necessary to remove the shields or caps from sprinklers. DO NOT use any sharp objects to remove them! Take care not to cause mechanical damage to sprinklers when removing the shields or caps. When removing caps from fusible ele- ment sprinklers, use care to prevent dislodging ejector springs or damaging fusible elements. NOTE: Squeezing the sprinkler cap excessively could damage sprinkler fusible elements. • To remove the shield, simply pull the ends of the shield apart where it is snapped together. Refer to Figure 1. • To remove the cap, turn it slightly and pull it off the sprinkler. Refer to Figures 2 and 3. MEMRefer to the current sprinkler technical data page to determine the correct sprinkler wrench for the model of sprinkler used. ©WARNING Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambient temperature allowed. * Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Figure 1: Sprinkler shield being removed from a pendent sprinkler Figure 2: Sprinkler cap being removed from a pendent sprinkler. Figure 3: Sprinkler cap being re- moved from and upright sprinkler. HOW TO REMOVE SHIELDS AND CAPS: No tools are necessary to remove the shields or caps from sprinklers. DO NOT use any sharp objects to remove them! Take care not to cause mechanical damage to sprinklers when removing the shields or caps. When removing caps from fusible ele- ment sprinklers, use care to prevent dislodging ejector springs or damaging fusible elements. NOTE: Squeezing the sprinkler cap excessively could damage sprinkler fusible elements. • To remove the shield, simply pull the ends of the shield apart where it is snapped together. Refer to Figure 1. • To remove the cap, turn it slightly and pull it off the sprinkler. Refer to Figures 2 and 3. MEMRefer to the current sprinkler technical data page to determine the correct sprinkler wrench for the model of sprinkler used. ©WARNING Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambient temperature allowed. * Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Page 3 of 4 U ARE AND HANDLING I KJ N7G*J 0 M OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com ACAUTION CONCEALED COVER ASSEMBLIES ARE FRAGILE! TO ASSURE SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT, HANDLE WITH CARE. Concealed Sprinkler and Adapter Assembly (Protective Cap Removed) Concealed Sprinkler and Adapter Assembly with Protective Cap Cover Plate Assembly (Pendent Cover 12381 shown) GENERAL HANDLING AND STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS: • Do not store in temperatures exceeding 100 °F (38 °C). Avoid direct sunlight and confined areas subject to heat. • Protect sprinklers and cover assemblies during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. Use original shipping containers. Do not place sprinklers or cover assemblies loose in boxes, bins, or buckets. • Keep the sprinkler bodies covered with the protective sprinkler cap any time the sprinklers are shipped or handled, during testing of the system, and while ceiling finish work is being completed. • Use only the designated Viking recessed sprinkler wrench (refer to the appropriate sprinkler data page) to install these sprinklers. NOTE: The protective cap is temporarily removed during installation and then placed back on the sprinkler for protection until finish work is completed. • Do not over -tighten the sprinklers into fittings during installation. • Do not use the sprinkler deflector to start or thread the sprinklers into fittings during installation. • Do not attempt to remove drywall, paint, etc., from the sprinklers. • Remove the plastic protective cap from the sprinkler before attaching the cover plate assembly. PROTECTIVE CAPS MUST BE REMOVED FROM SPRINKLERS BEFORE PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SERVICE! Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Page 4 of 4 CARE AND HANDLING 7W74j] 1111 OF SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com USE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING WAX -COATED SPRINKLERS Many of Viking's sprinklers are available with factory -applied wax coating for corrosion resistance. These sprinklers MUST receive appropriate care and handling to avoid damaging the wax coating and to assure satisfactory performance of the product. General Handling and Storage of Wax -Coated Sprinklers: • Store the sprinklers in a cool, dry place (in temperatures below the maximum ambient temperature allowed for the sprinkler temperature rating. Refer to Table 1 below.) • Store containers of wax -coated sprinklers separate from other sprinklers. • Protect the sprinklers during storage, transport, handling, and after installation. • Use original shipping containers. • Do not place sprinklers in loose boxes, bins, or buckets. Installation of Wax -Coated Sprinklers: Use only the special sprinkler head wrench designed for installing wax -coated Viking sprinklers (any other wrench may damage the unit). • Take care not to crack the wax coating on the units. • For touching up the wax coating after installation, wax is available from Viking in bar form. Refer to Table 1 below. The coating MUST be repaired after sprinkler installation to protect the corrosion -resistant properties of the sprinkler. • Use care when locating sprinklers near fixtures that can generate heat. Do not install sprinklers where they would be exposed to temperatures exceed- ing the maximum recommended ambient temperature for the temperature rating used. • Inspect the coated sprinklers frequently soon after installation to verify the integrity of the corrosion resistant coating. Thereafter, inspect representative samples of the coated sprinklers in accordance with NFPA 25. Close up visual inspections are necessary to determine whether the sprinklers are being affected by corrosive conditions. Sprinkler Temperature Rating (Fusing Point) Wax Part Number Wax Melting Point Maximum Ambient Ceiling Temperature Wax Color 155 °F (68 °C) / 165 °F (74 °C) 02568A 148 °F (64 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) Light Brown 175 °F (79 °C) 04146A 161 °F (71 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Brown 200 °F (93 °C) 04146A 161 °F (71 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Brown 220 °F (104 °C) 02569A 170 °F (76 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Dark Brown 286 °F (141 °C) 02569A 170 °F (76 °C) 150 °F (65 °C) Dark Brown Based on NFPA-13. Other limits may apply, depending on fire loading, sprinkler location, and other requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Refer to specific installation standards. ©WARNING Never install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or exposed to temperatures in excess of the maximum ambi- ent temperature allowed. Refer to the appropriate current technical data pages for complete care, handling, and installation instructions. Data pages are included with each shipment from Viking or Viking distributors. They can also be found on the Web site at www. vikinggroupinc.com. Form No. F_091699 18.10.11 Rev 16.1.P65 Replaces Form No. F_091699 Rev 16.1 (Added P65 Warning) Page 1 of 1 N4 I KJ REGULATORYAND HEALTH WARNINGS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page www.vikinggroupinc.com 1. DESCRIPTION Regulatory and Health Warnings applying to materials used in the manufacture and construction of fire protection products are provided herin as they relate to legally mandated jurisdictional regions. A WARNING STATE OF CALIFORNIA, USA Installing or servicing fire protection products such as sprinklers, valves, piping etc. can expose you to chemicals including, but not li- mited to, lead, nickel, butadiene, titaninum dioxide, chromium, carbon black, and acrylonitrile which are known to the State of California to cause cancer or birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information, go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov 2. WARRANTY TERMS AND CONDITIONS For details of warranty, refer to Viking's current list price schedule at www.vikinggroupinc.com or contact Viking directly. Form No. F 111218 18.11.15 Rev 18.1 New Bulletin Ah FM Approved and Wheatland Tube's 40 steel fire spri and UL° and C- nd Approvals and Specifications Schedule 10 and Schedule 40 meet or exceed the following standards: • ASTM A135, Type E, Grade A (Schedule 10, 1-8 NPS) • ASTM A795, Type E, Grade A (Schedule 40, 1-2 NPS) • ASTM A53, Type E, Grade B (Schedule 40, 2-8 NPS) • ASTM A53, Type F, Grade A (Schedule 40, 1-4 NPS) • NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 Manufacturing Protocols Schedule 10 and Schedule 40 are subjected to the toughest possible testing protocols to ensure the highest quality and long-lasting performance. PROJECT: ENGINEER: LOCATIONS: ❑ BLACK CONTRACTOR: Finishes and Coatings All Wheatland black steel fire sprinkler pipe receives a proprietary mill coating to ensure a clean, corrosion -resistant surface that outperforms and outlasts standard lacquer coatings. This coating allows the pipe to be easily painted, without special preparation. Schedule 10 and Schedule 40 can be ordered in black or hot -dip galvanized, to meet FM/UL requirements for dry systems that meet the zinc coating specifications of ASTM A795 or A53. Product Marking Each length of Wheatland fire sprinkler pipe is continuously stenciled to show the manufacturer, type of pipe, grade, size and length. Bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary identification method. SPECIFICATION REFERENCE: COMMENTS: ❑ HOT -DIP GALVANIZED DATE: SYSTEM TYPE: 1 Council Avenue, P.O. Box 608 Wheatland, PA 16161 P 800.257.8182 F 724.346.7260 info@wheatland.com wheatland.com Follow us on Twitter: @WheatlandTube ��Wheatland Tube A DIVISION OF ZEKELMAN INDUSTRIES SCHEDULE 10 WEIGHTS IMENSIONS WT./FT. WT./LIFT WT./LIFT WT./LIFT NIPS NOMINAL OD NOMINAL NOMINAL WALL WT./FT. H2O FILLED PCS./LIFT 21' 24' 25' UL in. mm in. mm Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs_ CRR* 1 1.315 33.4 1.097 27.9 2.77 1.405 1.814 70 2065 2360 2459 11.4 1% 1.660 42.2 1.442 36.6 0. .77 1.807 2.514 61 2315 2645 2756 7.3 11/z 1.900 48.3 1.682 42.7 0.109 2.087 3.049 61 2673 3055 3183 5.8 2 2.375 60.3 2.157 54.8 0.109 2.640 37 2051 2344 2442 4.7 21/z 2.875 73.0 2.635 66.9 0.120 3.0 54 30 2226 2544 2651 3.5 3 3.500 88.9 3.260 82.8 0.120 3.05 19 1730 1977 2060 2.6 4 4.500 114.3 4.260 108.2 0.120 3.05 5. 11. 19 2242 2562 2669 1.6 5 5.563 141.3 5.295 134.5 0.134 3.40 7.780 13 2124 2427 2529 1.5 6 6.625 168.3 6.357 161.5 0.134 3.40 10 1953 2232 2325 1.0 8 8.625 219.1 8.249 209.5 0.188 4.78 7 2493 2849 2968 2.1 SCHEDULE 40 WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS WT./FT. WT./LIFT WT./LIFT WT./LIFT NIPS NOMINAL OD NOMINAL ID NOMINAL WALL WT./FT. H2O FILLED PCS./LIFT 21' 24' 25' UL iim- in. mm __F' IjbE_' 'jr ".�M CRR* 1 1.315 33.4 1.049 26.6 0.133 3.38 1.68 2.055 70 2470 2822 2940 1.000 11/4 1.660 42.2 1.380 35.1 0.140 3.56 2.27 2.922 51 2431 2778 2894 1.000 11/z 1.900 48.3 1.610 40.9 0.145 3.68 2.72 3.602 44 2513 2872 2992 1.000 2 2.375 60.3 2.067 52.5 0.154 3.91 3.66 5.109 24 1845 2108 2196 1.000 21/z 2.875 73.0 2.469 62.7 0.203 5.16 5.80 7.871 20 2436 2784 2900 1.000 3 3.500 88.9 3.068 77.9 0.216 5.49 7.58 10.783 13 2069 2365 2464 1.000 3Yz 4.000 101.6 3.548 90.1 0.226 5.74 9.12 13.400 10 1915 2189 2280 1.000 4 4.500 114.3 4.026 102.3 0.237 6.02 10.80 16.311 10 2268 2592 2700 1.000 5 5.563 141.3 5.047 158.2 0.258 6.55 14.63 23.262 7 2151 2458 2560 1.000 6 6.625 168.3 6.065 154.1 0.280 7.11 18.99 31.498 5 1994 2279 2374 1.000 8** 8.625 219.1 7.981 202.7 0.322 8.18 28.58 50.240 5 3001 3430 3573 1.000 Calculated using Standard UL CPR formula, UL Fire Protection Directory, Category VIZY. The CPR is a ratio value used to measure the ability of a pipe to withstand corrosion. Threaded Schedule 40 steel pipe is used as the benchmark (value of 7.0). 8 NPS Schedule 40 is FM Approved but not UL Listed. UL C UL F M APPROVED 1 Council Avenue, P.O. Box 608 info@wheatland.com WFS-060520 - Wheatland, PA 16161 wheatland.com 4r Wheatland Tube P 800.257.8182 Follow us On Twitter: A DIVISION OF ZEKELMAN INDUSTRIES F 724.346.7260 @WheatlandTube FireLock° Rigid Coupling Style 005H with Vic -Plus"' Gasket System LEI ✓ct_au lic" 10.02 Material Specifications: Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, is available upon special request. Patented Exaggerated for clarity Housing Coating: (specify choice) VICP/l/S Standard: Orange enamel (North America); red Gasket System enamel (Europe) ❑ Optional: Hot dipped galvanized Approvals/Listings: LPCB Coupling Gasket: (specify choice) FM LISTED VdS NOTE: Additional gasket styles are available. Contact Victaulic for details. 104-1a/02 See Victaulic Publication 10.01 for more details. ❑ Grade "E" EPDM Type A Vic -Plus" Gasket System' LPC and VdS Approved, see notes on page 3 Product Description: FireLock Style 005H rigid coupling has a unique, patented angle -pad design which allows the housings to offset while clamping the grooves. By permitting the housings to slide on the angled bolt pads, rigidity is obtained. Support and hanging requirements correspond to NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems. Angle -pad design permits assembly by removing one nut/bolt and swinging the housing over the gasket. This reduces components to handle during assembly. Style 005H FireLock coupling are designed and recommended for use ONLY on fire protection systems. Vic -Plus'" Gasket System: Victaulic offers a gasket system which requires no field lubrication on wet pipe systems that are hydrostatically tested. The Vic -Plus System (patented) is dry, clean, and non -toxic. It reduces assembly time substantially and eliminates the mess and chance of over -lubrication. Please refer to the latest copy of the Victaulic Field Installation Handbook (1-100) for supplemental lubrication requirements and dry pipe fire protection system notes. Job/Owner System No. Location Contractor Submitted By Date EPDM (Violet color code). FireLock products have been Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and Approved by Factory Mutual Research for wet and dry (oil free air) sprinkler services up to the rated working pressure using the Grade "E" Type A Vic -Plus"" Gasket System, requiring no field lubrication for most installation conditions. ❑ Grade "L" silicone Recommended for dry heat, air without hydrocarbons to +350T and certain chemical services. For dry services, Victaulic continues to recommend the use of Grade "E" Type A FlushSeal° Gasket. Contact Victaulic for details. Bolts/Nuts: Heat -treated plated carbon steel, trackhead meeting the physical and chemical requirements of ASTM A-449 and physical requirements of ASTM A-183. Standard gasket and FlushSeal gasket approved for dry pipe systems to —40°F/-40°C. Based on "typical" pipe surface conditions, supplemental lubricant is recommended for services installed below 0°F/-18°C and for all dry pipe systems or systems to be subjected to air tests prior to being filled with water. Supplemental lubrication may also be required on pipe with raised or undercut weld seams or pipe that has voids and/or cracks at the weld seams. Victaulic continues to recommend the use of FlushSeal gaskets for dry services. Engineer Spec Section Paragraph Approved Date victaulic.com I Couplings I Rigid I Style 005H I Publication 10.02 10.02 1538 Rev M Updated 10/2014 © 2014 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. 1 �c_tau lic' victaulic.com I Couplings I Rigid I Style 005H I Publication 10.02 Dimensions: Y� �ZZ Rated for wet and dry sprinkler systems at 350 psi/2413 kPa for 1 1/4 - 4732 - 100 mm sizes and 300 psi /2068 kPa for 4 1/4 - 87108 - 200 mm sizes; Schedule 10 roll grooved or x Schedule 40 cut or roll grooved steel pipe. Style 005H is rigid and does not accommodate expansion, contraction or angular deflection. Actual Maximum Maximum Allow. Approx. Nominal Outside Working End Pipe End Dimensions Weight X Y Z Size Diameter Pressure14 Load' Separation Bolt/Nut' Each inches inches psi lbs. inches No. - size inches inches inches lbs. mm mm kPa N mm inches mm mm mm kg 11/4 1.660 350 755 0.05 2 -'/e x 21/4 2.75 4.50 1.88 1.2 32 42.4 2413 3370 1.2 70 114 48 0.5 11/2 1.900 350 990 0.05 _ 2 3/8 x 21/a 3.00 4.75 1.88 1.2 40 48.3 2413 4415 1.2 76 121 48 0.5 2 2.375 350 1550 0.07 2 -'/s x 21/z 3.50 5.25 1.88 1.6 50 60.3 2413 6900 1.7 89 133 48 0.7 21/2 2.875 350 2270 0.07 2 -'/a x 21/z 4.00 5.75 1.88 1.9 65 73.0 2413 10110 1.7 102 146 48 .09 76.1 mm 3.000 350 2475 0.07 2 -'/a x 21/z 4.13 5.75 1.88 1.9 76.1 2413 11010 1.7 105 146 48 0.9 3 3.500 350 3365 0.07 _ 2 3/e x 21/z 4.63 6.13 1.88 2.1 80 88.9 2413 14985 1.7 118 156 48 1.0 4 4.500 350 5565 0.16 _ 2 3/8 x 21/z 5.75 7.25 2.13 3.1 100 114.3 2413 24770 4.1 146 184 54 1.4 108.0 m m 4.250 300 4255 0.16 _ 2 3/8 x 21/2 5.63 7.25 2.13 3.1 108.0 2068 18940 4.1 143 184 54 1.4 5 5.563 300 7290 0.16 _ 2 1/z x 3 6.88 9.00 2.13 4.5 125 141.3 2068 32445 4.1 175 229 54 2.0 133.0 mm 5.250 300 6495 0.16 _ 2 1/z x 23/4 6.63 9.00 2.13 4.5 133.0 2068 28900 4.1 168 229 54 2.0 139.7 mm 5.500 300 7125 0.16 _ 2 1/2 x 23/4 6.88 9.00 2.13 4.8 139.7 2068 31715 4.1 175 229 54 2.2 6 6.625 300 10340 0.16 _ 2 1/z x 3 8.00 10.00 2.13 5.0 150 168.3 2068 46020 4.1 203 254 53 2.3 159.0 mm 6.250 300 9200 0.16 _ 2 1/2 x 23/4 7.63 10.00 2.13 5.5 159.0 2068 40955 4.1 194 254 54 2.5 165.1 mm 6.500 300 9955 0.16 _ 2 1/z x 3 8.15 10.00 2.13 5.5 165.1 2068 44295 4.1 207 254 54 2.5 8 8.625 300 17525 0.19 2 - 5/s x 41/a 10.50 13.14 2.63 11.3 200 219.1 2068 78000 4.8 267 334 67 5.1 1 Working Pressure and End Load are total, from all internal and external loads, based on standard weight (ANSI) steel pipe, standard roll or cut grooved in accordance with Victaulic specifications. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe. WARNING: FOR ONE TIME FIELD TEST ONLY, the Maximum Joint Working Pressure may be increased to 11h times the figures shown. 2 The allowable pipe separation dimension shown is for system layout purposes only. Style 005H couplings are considered rigid connections and will not accommodate expansion or contraction of the piping system. 3 Number of bolts required equals number of housing segments. Metric thread size bolts are available (color coded gold) for all coupling sizes upon request. Contact Victaulic for details. 4 Style 005H couplings are VdS and LPC Approved to 16 Bar/235 psi. 10.02 1538 Rev M Updated 10/2014 © 2014 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 2 dctaulic' victaulic.com I Couplings I Rigid I Style 005H I Publication 10.02 Listings/Approvals: The information provided below is based on the latest listing and approval data at the time of publication. Listings/Approvals are subject to change and/or additions by the approvals agencies. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe and the latest listings and approvals. Related Working Pressure psi Related Working Pressure psi Pipe Size Sch. inches UL ULC FM Related Working Pressure psi Pipe Size Sch. inches UL ULC FM Pipe Sch. Size inches UL ULC FM 5 11/4 — 3 175 175 175 EL 11/4 — 2 300 N/A N/A MT 11/4 — 2 300 N/A N/A 11/4 — 3 350 350 350 ET 11/4 — 2 300 N/A N/A STF 11/4 — 4 N/A N/A 300 10,40 5-8 300 300 300 EZ 4-6 3001 N/A 300 ST d y 11/4 — 2 N/A N/A 300 BLT 11/4 — 2 300 300 N/A FF 11/4 — 4 N/A N/A 300 TF 3-8 N/A N/A 300 DF 11/4 — 4 300 300 300 GAL -7 11/4 — 2 300 N/A N/A WLS 11/4 — 2 300 300 N/A DT 11/4 — 2 300 300 N/A MILT 11/4 — 2 300 N/A N/A XL 11/4 — 3 300 300 300 EF 11/4 — 4 1757 N/A 175 MF 11/4 — 4 300 N/A 3001 5 FM approved for service in 1 112 — 4" pipe. 6 UL Listed for service up to 4" pipe only. 7 UL Listed for service up to 3" only. Installation Note Reference should always be made to the 1-100 Victaulic Field Installation Handbook for This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment of Victaulic to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. products for complete installation and assembly data, and are available in PDF format Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard on our website at www.victaulic.com. equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. Warranty Trademarks Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. Victaulic® is a registered trademark of Victaulic Company. 10.02 1538 Rev M Updated 10/2014 © 2014 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 3 ✓ctaulic' Victaulic° Firel-ockT" Installation -Ready'" Rigid Couplings ✓ctaill Style 009N and Style 109 10.64 Patented Patented 1.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Available Sizes • Style 009N: 11/4 — 12"/DN32 — DN300 • Style 109: 11/4 — 4"/DN32 — DN100 Pipe Material • Schedule 10, Schedule 40 or specialty carbon steel pipe listed in Section 5. For use with alternative materials and wall thicknesses please contact Victaulic • For exceptions reference section 6.0 Notifications Maximum Working Pressure • Up to 365 psi/2517 kPa Function • Joins carbon steel pipe with grooved ends conforming to publication 25.01 • Provides a rigid pipe joint designed to restrict axial or angular movement 2.0 CERTIFICATION/LISTINGS c BL uS FM LPCB = VdS C E LISTED 104-1a/36 EN 10311 Regulation (EU) No. 305/2011 ALWAYS REFER TO ANY NOTIFICATIONS AT THE END OF THIS DOCUMENT REGARDING PRODUCT INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR SUPPORT. System No. Location Submitted By Date Spec Section Paragraph Approved Date victaulic.com 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 02/2021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. 1 dctaulic® victaulic.com 3.0 SPECIFICATIONS — MATERIAL Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 395, Grade 65-45-15, is available upon special request. Housing Coating: (specify choice) ❑ Orange enamel (North America, Asia Pacific) ❑ Red enamel (Europe) ❑ Optional for Style 009N: Hot Dipped Galvanized per ASTM Gas&29pecify choice) ❑ Grade "E" EPDM (Type A) Vic-Plus"m Pre -lubricated Gasket EPDM (Violet Color Code). Applicable for wet and dry (oil -free air) fire protection systems only. Listed/Approved for continuous use in wet and dry systems. Listed/Approved for dry systems at-40°F/-40°C and above. Not compatible for use with hot water services or steam services. NOTES • Reference should always be made to publication 1-100, Victaulic Field Installation Handbook for gasket lubrication instructions. • Services listed are General Service Guidelines only. It should be noted that there are services for which these gaskets are not compatible. Reference should always be made to publication 05 01, Victaulic Gasket Selection Guide for specific gasket service guidelines and for a listing of services which are not compatible. Bolts/Nuts: (specify choice) Standard: Carbon steel oval neck track bolt(s) meeting the mechanical property requirements of ASTM A449 (imperial) and ISO 898-1 Class 9.8 (M10-M16) Class 8.8 (M20 and greater). Carbon steel hex nuts meeting the mechanical property requirements of ASTM A563 Grade B (imperial) and ASTM A563M Class 9 (metric). Track bolts and hex nuts are zinc electroplated per ASTM B633 Fe/Zn 5, finish Type III (imperial) or Type II (metric). ❑ Optional for Style 009N: Stainless steel oval neck track bolts meeting the requirements of ASTM F593, Group 2 (316 stainless steel), condition CW. Stainless steel Heavy Hex nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM F594, Group 2 (316 stainless steel), condition CW, with galling -resistant coating.' 1 Optional bolts/nuts are available in imperial size only. Coupling Linkage: High Strength Steel with comparable physical properties to that of the Track Bolt (ASTM A449). Linkage is zinc electroplated per ASTM B633 Fe/Zn 5, Type III Finish. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 0 ✓ctaulid victaulic.com 4.0 DIMENSIONS Style 009N Two -Bolt Installation -Ready Coupling Size Actual Maximum Maximum Allow. Bolt/Nut Dimensions Weight Pre -assembled Joint Assembled Outside Working End Pipe End Approx. X Y X Y Nominal Diameter Pressure2 Load2 Separation3 Qty. Size Z (Each) inches inches psi lb inches inches inches inches inches inches inches lb DN mm kPa N mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg 1 'A 1.660 365 790 0.10 2 3/8 x 2 3.13 5.00 2.75 5.00 2.00 1.4 DN32 42.4 2517 3514 2.54 M10 x 51 79 127 70 127 51 0.6 1 Y2 1.900 365 1035 0.10 3/s x 2 3.38 5.13 3.00 5.13 2.00 1.5 DN40 48.3 2517 4604 2.54 2 M10 x 51 86 130 76 130 51 0.7 2 2.375 365 1617 0.12 3/8 x 21/2 4.00 5.63 3.50 5.63 2.00 DN50 60.3 2517 7193 3.05 2 M10 x 63 102 143 89 143 51 ..9 09 21/2 2.875 365 2370 0.12 3/8 x 21/2 4.50 6.13 4.00 6.13 2.00 2.1 73.0 2517 10542 3.05 2 M 10 x 63 114 156 102 156 51 1.0 3.000 365 2580 0.12 3/s x 21/2 4.63 6.00 4.13 6.13 2.00 2.1 DN65 1 76.1 2517 11476 3.05 2 M10 x 63 118 152 105 156 51 1.0 3 3.500 365 3512 0.12 3/8 x 21/2 5.13 6.75 4.63 6.75 2.00 2.3 DN80 88.9 2517 15622 3.05 2 M10 x 63 130 171 117 171 51 1.0 4 4.500 365 5805 0.17 3/8 x 21/2 6.00 7.88 5.63 7.50 2.13 2.9 DN100 114.3 2517 25822 4.32 21 M10x63 152 200 1 143 191 54 1.3 4.250 365 5178 0.17 2 3/s x 21/2 5.63 7.38 5.38 7.38 2.13 3.1 108.0 2517 23020 4.32 M10 x 63 152 1.87 137 187 54 1.4 5 5.563 365 8872 0.17 2 1/2 x 3 7.25 9.25 6.75 9.13 2.25 5.0 141.3 2517 39456 4.32 M12 x 76 184 235 171 232 57 1 2.3 5.250 365 7901 0.17 2 1/2 x 3 6.63 9.00 6.38 9.00 2.25 4.8 133.0 2517 35106 4.32 M 12 x 76 168 229 162 229 57 2.2 5.500 365 8672 0.17 2 1/2 x 3 6.88 9.25 6.75 9.13 2.25 4.9 DN125 139.7 2517 38529 4.32 M12 x 76 175 235 1 171 232 57 2.2 6 6.625 365 12582 0.17 1/2 x 3'/4 8.38 10.38 7.88 10.13 2.25 6.0 DN150 168.3 2517 44469 4.32 2 M12 x 83 213 264 200 257 57 2.7 6.250 365 11198 0.17 1/2 x 31/4 7.88 10.00 7.38 9.88 2.25 5.6 159.0 2517 49753 4.32 2 M 12 x 83 200 254 187 251 57 2.5 6.500 365 12112 0.17 1/2 x 3 1/4 8.00 10.25 7.75 10.13 2.25 6.0 165.1 2517 53813 4.32 2 M12 x 83 203 260 197 257 57 2.7 8 8.625 365 21326 0.17 5/8 x 4 10.88 13.38 10.25 13.13 2.50 11.4 DN200 219.1 2517 94863 4.32 2 M16 x 101 276 340 260 333 64 5.2 8.500 365 20712 0.17 1/8 x 4 10.63 13.25 10.25 10.13 2.63 11.4 216.0 2517 55968 4.32 2 M16 x 101 270 337 260 257 67 5.2 10 10.750 300 27229 0.25 7/s x 61/2 13.75 17.00 13.25 17.13 2.75 22.6 DN250 273.0 2068 121121 6.4 2 M22 x 165 349 432 337 435 70 10.3 12 12.750 300 38303 0.25 7/8 x 61/2 16.00 19.00 15.50 19.13 2.75 27.6 DN300 323.9 2068 170380 6.4 2 M22 x 165 1 406 1 483 1 394 1 486 1 70 1 12.5 2 Working Pressure and End Load are total, from all internal and external loads, based on standard weight (ANSI) steel pipe, standard roll or cut grooved in accordance with Victaulic specifications. See the Listings/Approvals section of this publication for ratings on other pipe. 3 The allowable pipe separation dimension shown is for system layout purposes only. Style 009N couplings are considered rigid connections and will not accommodate expansion or contraction of the piping system. NOTES • When assembling Style 009N or Style 109 couplings onto end caps, take additional care to make certain the end cap is fully seated against the gasket end stop. For Style 009N or Style 109 couplings, use Fire Lock No. 006 end caps containing the "EZ" marking on the inside face or No. 60 end caps containing the "QV EZ" marking on the inside face. Non-Victaulic end cap products shall not be used with Style 009N or Style 109 couplings. IMPORTANT: Gaskets intended for the Style 009 or Style 009V couplings cannot be used with the Style 009N or Style 109 coupling. There is no interchanging of gaskets or housings between coupling styles. • Use Of FlushSeal Gaskets For Dry Pipe Systems Style 009N or Style 109 couplings are supplied with Grade "E" Type A gaskets. These gaskets include an integral pipe stop, that once installed provides the similar benefits as a FlushSeal gasket for dry pipe systems. It should be noted that standard Victaulic FlushSeal gaskets cannot be used with the Style 009N or Style 109 couplings. • The Allowable Pipe End Separation dimension shown is for system layout purposes only. Style 009N or Style 109 Installation -Ready rigid couplings are considered rigid connections and will not accommodate expansion/contraction or angular movement of the piping system. Contact Victaulic for torsional resistance information. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 3 ✓ctaulid victaulic.com 4.1 DIMENSIONS Style 109 One -Bolt Installation -Ready Coupling Style 109 Pre -Assembled Style 109 Joint Assembled Size Max. Max. Allow. Pipe Bolt/Nut Dimensions Weight Actual Pre -Assembled Assembled Outside Working End End Sep. Approx. Nominal Diameter Pressure Load Maximum Qty. Size YB X z YL YB X z (Each) inches inches psi Lbs. inches inches inches inches inches inches inches inches inches lb DN mm kPa N mm mm J1.97 mm mm m m mm mm mm mm kg 1 1 /4 1.660 365 790 0.10 3/8 x 2 12.49 3.17 1.95 1.93 2.59 2.84 1.95 1.5 DN32 42.4 2517 3514 2.54 1 M10x5763 81 50 49 66 72 50 0.7 1 1 /2 1.900 365 1035 0.10 3/8 x 2 1 4 2.13 2.60 3.41 1.95 2.1 2.68 3.07 1.95 1.6 DN40 48.3 2517 4603 2.54 1 M10 x 57 54 66 87 50 53 68 78 50 0.7 2 2.375 365 1617 0.12 3/8 x 2 1 4 2.32 2.85 3.76 1.98 2.29 2.95 3.45 1.98 1.9 DN50 60.3 2517 7192 3.048 1 M10 x 57 59 72 96 50 58 75 88 1 50 0.9 21 /2 2.875 365 2370 0.12 3/8 x 2 1 4 2.63 3.09 4.29 1.99 2.61 3.15 3.93 1.99 2.1 73.0 2517 10540 3.048 1 M10 x 57 67 78 109 51 66 80 100 51 1.0 3 3.500 365 3512 0.12 7/16 x 2 /42.93 3.53 5.13 2.07 2.89 3.78 4.67 2.07 2.7 DN80 88.9 2517 15620 3.048 1 M11 x69 74 90 130 1 53 73 96 119 53 1.2 4 4.500 300 4771 0.17 7/16 x 2 /43.47 4.01 6.03 2.08 3.43 4.22 5.56 2.08 3.5 DN100 114.3 2068 21223 4.318 1 M11 x 69 88 102 153 53 87 107 141 53 1.6 4 Working Pressure and End Load are total, from all internal and external loads, based on standard weight (ANSI) steel pipe, standard roll or cut grooved in accordance with Victaulic specifications. See the Listings/Approvals section of this publication for ratings on other pipe. 5 The allowable pipe separation dimension shown is for system layout purposes only. Style 109 couplings are considered rigid connections and will not accommodate expansion or contraction of the piping system. NOTES • When assembling Style 009N or Style 109 couplings onto end caps, take additional care to make certain the end cap is fully seated against the gasket end stop. For Style 009N or Style 109 couplings, use Fire Lock No. 006 end caps containing the "EZ" marking on the inside face or No. 60 end caps containing the "QV EZ" marking on the inside face. Non-Victaulic end cap products shall not be used with Style 009N or Style 109 couplings. IMPORTANT: Gaskets intended for the Style 009 or Style 009V couplings cannot be used with the Style 009N or Style 109 coupling. There is no interchanging of gaskets or housings between coupling styles. • Use Of FlushSeal Gaskets For Dry Pipe Systems Style 009N or Style 109 couplings are supplied with Grade "E" Type A gaskets. These gaskets include an integral pipe stop, that once installed provides the similar benefits as a FlushSeal gasket for dry pipe systems. It should be noted that standard Victaulic FlushSeal gaskets and cannot be used with the Style 009N or Style 109 couplings. • The Allowable Pipe End Separation dimension shown is for system layout purposes only. Style 009N or Style 109 Installation -Ready rigid couplings are considered rigid connections and will not accommodate expansion/contraction or angular movement of the piping system. Contact Victaulic for torsional resistance information. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com M ✓ctaulid victaulic.com 5.0 PERFORMANCE Style 009N Two -Bolt Installation -Ready Coupling Listings/ApprovalS6 The information provided below is based on the latest listing and approval data at the time of publication. Listings/Approvals are subject to change and/or additions by the approval agencies. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe and the latest listings and approvals. Size cULus" FMII Sch.10 Sch.40 Sch.10 Sch.40 VdS LPCB Actual Outside Nominal Diameter psi psi psi psi psi psi inches inches kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa DIN mm bar bar bar bar bar bar 365 365 363 363 363 363 11/4 1.660 2517 2517 2503 2503 2500 2500 DN32 42.4 25 25 25 25 25 25 365 365 363 363 363 363 11/2 1.900 DN40 48.3 2517 2517 2503 2503 2500 2500 25 25 25 25 25 25 365 365 363 363 363 363 2 2.375 DN50 60.3 2517 2517 2503 2500 2500 2500 25 25 25 25 25 25 365 365 363 363 363 363 2.875 21/2 73.0 2517 2517 2503 2500 2500 2500 25 25 25 25 25 25 3657 3638 363 363 3.000 25177 91 25038 2500 2500 DN65 76.1 257 258 25 25 365 365 363 363 363 363 3 3.500 DN80 88.9 2517 2517 2503 2503 2500 2500 25 25 25 25 25 25 365 365 363 363 363 363 4 4.500 DN100 114.3 2517 2517 2503 2503 2500 2500 25 25 25 25 25 25 363 363 4.250 N/A N/A 2503 2503 N/A N/A 108.0 25 25 290 365 363 363 232 363 5.563 5 2000 2517 2503 2503 1600 2500 141.3 20 25 25 25 16 25 3638 5.250 N/A N/A 25038 N/A N/A N/A 133.0 25 2909 3638 232 363 500 DN125 20009 N/A 25038 N/A 1600 2500 139.7 39.7 209 258 25 25 300 365 363 363 232 363 6 6.625 2068 2517 2503 2503 1600 2500 DN150 168.3 20 25 257 25 16 25 3638 6.250 N/A N/A 25038 N/A N/A N/A 159.0 25 29010 3638 363 6.500 200010 N/A 25038 N/A N/A 2500 165.1 20 258 25 6 Listed/Approved for continuous use in wet and dry systems. Listed/Approved for dry systems -40' F/C and above. Please see the Victaulic Installation Manual 1-009N for details concerning when supplemental lubrication is required. 7 cULus listed for DIN 2458 (EN 10220) 2.6 mm pipe wall. 8 FM approved for BS 1387 (EN 10255) Medium 3.6 mm pipe wall. 9 cULus listed for EN 10220 4.0 mm pipe wall. 10 cULus listed for EN 10255 4.5 mm pipe wall. 11 With optional stainless steel fasteners, cULus Listed to 175psi/1207 kPa/12 bar and FM Approved to the FM ratings shown in the above table. The stainless steel fasteners have a marking designation of "316" on the end face of the bolt. 12 cUL listed to 250 psi/1720 kPa /17 bar. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com X ✓ctaulid victaulic.com 5.0 PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED) Style 009N Two -Bolt Installation -Ready Coupling Listings/Approvals6 The information provided below is based on the latest listing and approval data at the time of publication. Listings/Approvals are subject to change and/or additions by the approval agencies. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe and the latest listings and approvals. Size cULus" FMII VdS LPCB Actual Outside Sch.10 Sch.40 Sch.10 Sch.40 Nominal Diameter psi psi psi psi psi psi inches inches kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa DIN mm bar bar bar bar bar bar 300 365 363 363 231P 363 8 8.625 2068 2517 2503 2503 1600 2500 DN200 219.1 20 25 25 25 16 25 290 3638 8.500 2000 N/A 25038 N/A N/A N/A 216.0 20 300 257 300 300 300 10 10.750 2068 2068 2068 2068 N/A N/A DN250 273.0 20 1 20 20 20 30012 300 250 300 12 12 .750 206812 2068 1720 2068 N/A N/A DN300 3.75 2012 25 17 20 6 Listed/Approved for continuous use in wet and dry systems. Listed/Approved for dry systems -40' F/C and above. Please see the Victaulic Installation Manual 1-009N for details concerning when supplemental lubrication is required. 7 cULus listed for DIN 2458 (EN 10220) 2.6 mm pipe wall. 8 FM approved for BS 1387 (EN 10255) Medium 3.6 mm pipe wall. 9 cULus listed for EN 10220 4.0 mm pipe wall. 10 cULus listed for EN 10255 4.5 mm pipe wall. 11 With optional stainless steel fasteners, cULus Listed to 175psi/1207 kPa/12 bar and FM Approved to the FM ratings shown in the above table. The stainless steel fasteners have a marking designation of "316" on the end face of the bolt. 12 cUL listed to 250 psi/1720 kPa /17 bar. 5.1 PERFORMANCE Style 109 One -Bolt Installation -Ready Coupling Listings/ApprovaIS13 The information provided below is based on the latest listing and approval data at the time of publication. Listings/ Approvals are subject to change and/or additions by the approvals agencies. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe and the latest listings and approvals. Size cULus FM Sch.10 Sch.40 Sch.10 Sch.40 Nominal Actual Outside Diameter psi psi psi psi inches inches kPa kPa kPa kPa DIN m m bar bar bar bar 365 365 365 365 11/4 1.660 2517 2517 2517 2517 DN32 42.4 25 25 25 25 365 365 365 365 1 1/2 1.900 2517 2517 2517 2517 DN40 48.3 25 25 25 25 365 365 365 365 2 2.375 DN50 60.3 2517 2517 2517 2517 25 25 25 25 365 365 365 365 2.875 21/2 2517 2517 2517 2517 73.0 25 25 25 25 365 365 365 365 3 3.500 2517 2517 2517 2517 DN80 88.9 25 25 25 25 300 365 300 365 4 4.500 DN 100 114.3 2068 2517 2068 2517 20 25 20 25 Listed/Approved for continuous use in wet and dry systems. Listed/Approved for dry systems -40' F/C and above. Please see the Victaulic Installation Manual 1-109 for details concerning when supplemental lubrication is required. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com L ✓ctaulid victaulic.com 5.2 PERFORMANCE Specialty Pipe Style 009N Two -Bolt Installation -Ready Coupling Listings/Approvals Size Pressure Rating cULus FM psi psi inches kPa kPa Pipe Type DIN bar bar 1'/4-4 300 EF DN32 — DN100 2068 N/A 20 300 300 EL 1 1/4-2 2068 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 20 300 ET40 1 1/4-2 2068 N/A DN32 — DN50 20 300 EZF 3-4 2068 N/A DN80 — DN100 20 300 300 EZT 1 '/4 — 2 2068 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 20 300 FF 1'/z-4 2068 N/A DN40 — DIN 100 20 300 300 G L 1 '/4 — 2 2068 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 20 300 300 1 1/4-4 DN32 — DIN 100 2068 2068 20 20 MF 175 175 6 6 D 1205 1205 12 12 300 300 MT 1 1/4-2 2068 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 20 300 MILT 1 1/4-2 N/A 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 300 TF 2'/z — 4 N/A 2068 73.0 mm — DN100 20 175 300 WG5, WG5EWF5, WG7, WG7E, WL7 4 1 '/a — 4 1205 2068 , DN32 DIN 12 20 300 300 WLS 1 1/4-2 2068 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 20 NOTES • EF = EDDY FLOW steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • EL = EDDYLITE steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • ET40 = Eddythread 40 steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • EZF = EZ-Flow steel pipe manufactured by Northwest Pipe Co. • EZT = EZ-Thread steel pipe manufactured by Youngstown Tube Co. • FF = Fire -Flo steel pipe manufactured by Youngstown Tube Co. • GL = GL steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MF = Mega -Flow steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MT = Mega -Thread steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MILT = MILT steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co • TF = Tex -Flow steel pipe manufactured by Tex -Tube Co. • WG5, WG5E, WF5 = WGalweld 5, WGalweld 5E, WFlow 5 steel pipe manufactured by Wuppermann Stahl GmbH. • WG7, WG7E, WL7 = WGalweld 7, Wgalweld 7E, WLight 7 steel pipe manufactured by Wuppermann Stahl GmbH • WLS = WLS steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 7 ✓ctaulid victaulic.com 5.3 PERFORMANCE Specialty Pipe Style 109 One -Bolt Installation -Ready Coupling Listings/Approvals Size Pressure Rating cULus FM inches psi psi kPa kPa Pipe Type DN bar bar 300 1'/a — 21/2 N/A 2068 DN32 — 73.0 mm 20 300 EF 1 1/2 — 21/2 20668 N/A DN40 — 73.0 mm 20 300 300 3-4 DN80 — DN 100 2068 2068 20 20 300 1 1/4 — 2 N/A 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 Easy -Flow 3-4 N/A 300 2068 DN80 — DN 100 20 300 EL 11/4-2 N/A 20668 DN32 — DN50 20 300 300 ET40 1 1/4-2 2068 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 20 300 11/4-2 N/A 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 EZT 300 11/2-2 2068 N/A DN40 — DN50 20 300 300 1 12 — 4 FF DN40 — DN 100 20268 20068 20 300 GL 1 1/4 — 2 N/A 2068 DN32 — DN50 300 300 1 1/4 — 4 MF DN32 — DN 100 2068 2068 20 20 300 300 MT 11/4 — 2 2068 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 20 300 300 11/4 — 2 MLT DN32 — DN50 2068 2068 20 20 NOTES • EF = EDDY FLOW steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • Easy -Flow = Easy -Flow steel pipe manufactured by Borusan Mannesmann Boru. • EL = EDDYLITE steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • ET40 = Eddythread 40 steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • EZT = EZ-Thread steel pipe manufactured by Youngstown Tube Co. • FF = Fire -Flo steel pipe manufactured by Youngstown Tube Co. • GL = GL steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MF = Mega -Flow steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MT = Mega -Thread steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MLT = MLT steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • TF = Tex -Flow steel pipe manufactured by Tex -Tube Co. • WG7, WG7E = WGalweld 7 and WGalweld 7E steel pipe manufactured by Wuppermann Stahl GmbH. • WLS = WLS steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com We ✓ctaulid victaulic.com 5.3 PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED) Specialty Pipe Style 109 One -Bolt Installation -Ready Coupling Listings/Approvals Size Pressure Rating clJLus FM inches psi psi kPa kPa Pipe Type DIN bar bar 300 TF 212 — 4 N/A 20668 73.00 mm — DN 100 20 300 1 V4-2 N/A 2068 DN32 — DN50 20 WG7, WG7E 300 3 4 N/A 2068 DN80 — DN100 20 300 WLS 11/4-2 2068 DN32 — DN50 VM M= 20 NOTES • EF = EDDY FLOW steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • Easy -Flow = Easy -Flow steel pipe manufactured by Borusan Mannesmann Boru. • EL = EDDYLITE steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • ET40 = Eddythread 40 steel pipe manufactured by Bull Moose Tube Co. • EZT = EZ-Thread steel pipe manufactured by Youngstown Tube Co. • FF = Fire -Flo steel pipe manufactured by Youngstown Tube Co. • GL = GL steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MF = Mega -Flow steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MT = Mega -Thread steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • MLT = MLT steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. • TF = Tex -Flow steel pipe manufactured by Tex -Tube Co. • WG7, WG7E = WGalweld 7 and WGalweld 7E steel pipe manufactured by Wuppermann Stahl GmbH. • WLS = WLS steel pipe manufactured by Wheatland Tube Co. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com A ✓ctaulid victaulic.com 6.0 NOTIFICATIONS A WARNING _ Read and understand all instructions before attempting to install any Victaulic products. • Always verify that the piping system has been completely depressurized and drained immediately prior to installation, removal, adjustment, or maintenance of any Victaulic products. • Wear safety glasses, hardhat, and foot protection. . Failure to follow these instructions could result in death or serious personal injury and property damage. • These products shall be used only in fire protection systems that are designed and installed in accordance with current, applicable National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 13, 13D, 13R, etc.) standards, or equivalent standards, and in accordance with applicable building and fire codes. These standards and codes contain important information regarding protection of systems from freezing temperatures, corrosion, mechanical damage, etc. • The installer shall understand the use of this product and why it was specified for the particular application. • The installer shall understand common industry safety standards and potential consequences of improper product installation. • It is the system designer's responsibility to verify suitability of materials for use with the intended fluid media within the piping system and external environment. • The material specifier shall evaluate the effect of chemical composition, pH level, operating temperature, chloride level, oxygen level, and flow rate on materials to confirm system life will be acceptable for the intended service. Failure to follow installation requirements and local and national codes and standards could compromise system integrity or cause system failure, resulting in death or serious personal injury and property damage. NOTICE • Victaulic does not recommend the use of any furnace butt -welded pipe with sizes 27DN50 and smaller Victaulic gasketed joint products. This includes, but is not limited to, ASTM A53 Type F pipe. 7.0 REFERENCE MATERIALS 05.01: Seal Selection Guide 25.01: Original Groove Svstem (OGS) Groove Specifications 1-009N: Installation Instructions Fire Lock EZTm Rigid Coupling Style 009N 1-100: Victaulic Field Installation Handbook 1-109: Installation Instructions Firel-ockTM One -Bolt Rigid Coupling Style 109 I-ENDCAP: Victaulic End Caps Installation Instructions I -IMPACT: Impact Tool Usage Guidelines User Responsibility for Product Selection and Suitability Note Each user bears final responsibility for making a determination as to the suitability of This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products Victaulic products for a particular end -use application, in accordance with industry to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. standards and project specifications, and the applicable building codes and related Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard regulations as well as Victaulic performance, maintenance, safety, and warning equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. instructions. Nothing in this or any other document, nor any verbal recommendation, Installation advice, or opinion from any Victaulic employee, shall be deemed to alter, vary, supersede, Reference should always be made to the Victaulic installation handbook or installation or waive any provision of Victaulic Company's standard conditions of sale, installation instructions of the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment guide, or this disclaimer. of Victaulic products, providing complete installation and assembly data, and are available Intellectual Property Rights in PDF format on our website at www.victaulic.com. No statement contained herein concerning a possible or suggested use of any material, Warranty product, service, or design is intended, or should be constructed, to grant any license Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. under any patent or other intellectual property right of Victaulic or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates covering such use or design, or as a recommendation for the use of such Trademarks material, product, service, or design in the infringement of any patent or other intellectual Victaulic and all other Victaulic marks are the trademarks or registered trademarks of property right. The terms "Patented" or "Patent Pending" refer to design or utility patents Victaulic Company, and/or its affiliated entities, in the U.S. and/or other countries. or patent applications for articles and/or methods of use in the United States and/or other countries. 10.64 7072 Rev 0 Updated 0212021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 10 ✓ctaulic° Victaulic° Drain Elbow No. 10-DR Material Specifications ✓ct_au lic" 10.05 Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12. Housing Coating: (specify choice) Standard: Orange enamel. ❑ Optional: Hot dipped galvanized and others. ADDrovals/Listines See Victaulic publication 10.01 for details Product Description No. 10-DR drain elbows are specifically designed for use on fire protection standpipes. The drain is drilled and tapped for a 1'725 mm NPT outlet. Constructed of durable ductile iron all sizes conform to the ratings of Style 77 couplings. No.10-DR elbows are supplied with grooves or shoulders. These fittings are not intended for use with Victaulic Plain End couplings. When connecting wafer or lug -type butterfly valves directly to Victaulic drain elbows with Style 741 or 743 Vic -Flange® Adapters or Style 744 FireLock® Flange Adapters, check disc clearance dimensions with the I.D. dimension of the fitting. Job/Owner Engineer System No. Location Contractor Submitted By Date Fittings I Elbow I No. 10-DR I Publication 10.05 10.05 1509 Rev E Updated 11/2013 © 2013 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtnnlir rnm 1 Spec Section Paragraph Approved ✓ctaulic' Fittings I Elbow I No. 10-DR I Publication 10.05 Dimensions No 10-DR o P H oa C to E IF Fitting Size Dimensions Actual Outside Approximate Weight Nominal Size Diameter C - E H P Each inches inches inches inches inches lbs. mm mm mm mm mm kg 2'/2 2.875 3.75 2.75 1.68 5.2 65 73.0 95 70 43 2.4 3 3.500 4.25 2.75 2.10 5.3 80 88.9 108 70 53 2.4 4 4.500 5.00 2.75 2.60 8.8 100 114.3 127 70 66 4.0 6 6.625 6.50 2.75 3.65 18.7 150 168.3 165 70 93 8.5 Installation Reference should always be made to the 1-100 Victaulic Field Installation Handbook for the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment of Victaulic products for complete installation and assembly data, and are available in PDF format on our website at www.victaulic.com. Warranty Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. Note This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. Trademarks Victaulic®, Fire Lock and Vic -Flange are registered trademarks of Victaulic Company. 10.05 1509 Rev E Updated 11/2013 © 2013 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 2 ✓C_taU1_iCr Victaulic° FireLock"' Fittings 1.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Available Sizes • 11/a — 8"/DN32 — DN200 ✓ctaulEc` 10.03 Maximum Working Pressure • Pressure ratings for Victaulic FireLockTm Fittings conform to the ratings of Victaulic FireLock EZTM Style 009N couplings (refer to publication 10.64 for more information). Application • FireLockT"' fittings are designed for use exclusively with Victaulic couplings that have been Listed or Approved for Fire Protection Services. Use of other couplings or flange adapters may result in bolt pad interference. • Connects pipe, provides change in direction and adapts sizes or components Pipe Materials • Carbon steel 2.0 CERTIFICATION/LISTINGS D@us <S> LPCB LISTED VdS C E EN 10311 Regulation (EU) No. 305/2011 3.0 SPECIFICATIONS — MATERIAL Fitting: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Fitting Coating: ❑ Orange enamel. ❑ Red enamel in Europe, Middle East, Africa, and India. ❑ Optional: Hot dipped galvanized. ALWAYS REFER TO ANY NOTIFICATIONS AT THE END OF THIS DOCUMENT REGARDING PRODUCT INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR SUPPORT. System No. Location Submitted By Date U442111ir rnm Spec Section Paragraph Approved Date 10.03 1539 Rev N Updated 09/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. 1 ✓ctauliic® victaulic.com 4.0 DIMENSIONS �CtoE toE� Cj T p 0 0 C- �� �+ 0 �jDpo J -T-- 1 C to to J'F olo E No. 001 No. 003 No. 002 No. 006 No. 001 No. 003 No. 002 No. 006 90' Elbow 45° Elbow Straight Tee Cap Actual Approximate Approximate Approximate Approximate Nominal Outside Weight Weight Weight Weight Size Diameter C to E Each C to E Each C to E Each T Each inches inches inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb DN mm mm kg mm kg mm kg mm kg 11/4 1.660 - - - - - - 0.82 0.3 DN32 42.4 - - - - - - 21 0.1 1 1/2 1.900 - - - - - - 0.82 0.4 DN40 48.3 - - - - - - 21 0.2 2 2.375 2.75 1.7 2.00 1.8 2.75 2.4 0.88 0.6 DN50 60.3 70 0.8 51 0.8 70 1.1 22 0.3 21/2 2.875 3.00 3.1 2.25 2.2 3.00 3.6 0.88 1.0 73.0 76 1.4 57 1.0 76 1.6 22 0.5 3.000 3.00 3.30 2.25 2.4 3.00 3.8 DN65 76.1 76 1.5 57 1.1 76 1.7 3 3.500 3.38 4.0 2.50 3.1 3.38 5.3 0.88 1.2 DN80 88.9 86 1.8 64 1.4 86 2.4 22 0.5 4.250 4.00 5.7 3.00 5.1 4.00 7.5 108.0 102 2.6 76 2.3 102 3.4 4 4.500 4.00 6.7 3.00 5.6 4.00 8.7 1.00 2.4 DN100 114.3 102 3.0 76 2.5 102 3.9 25 1.1 5 5.563 4.88 12.6 3.25 8.3 4.88 15.7 1.00 4.1 141.3 124 5.7 83 3.8 124 7.1 25 1.9 5.500 4.88 12.4 3.25 8.2 4.88 15.4 DN125 139.7 124 5.6 82.6 3.7 124 6.9 6.250 5.50 12.6 3.50 9.2 5.50 17.9 158.8 140 5.7 89 4.2 140 8.0 6 6.625 5.50 18.3 3.50 11.7 5.50 22.7 1.00 5.9 DN150 168.3 140 8.3 89 5.3 140 10.3 25 2.7 6.500 5.43 17.6 3.50 11.4 5.50 22.0 165.1 140 7.9 89 5.2 140 9.9 8 8.625 6.81 25.5 4.25 20.4 6.94 38.7 1.13 12.7 DN200 219.1 173 11.6 108 9.3 176 17.6 29 5.8 8.515 6.81 23.1 - - 6.94 33.6 - - 216.3 173 10.5 - - 176 15.2 - - 10.03 1539 Rev N Updated 09/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 2 ✓ctaulic® victaulic.com 5.0 PERFORMANCE Flow Data Size Frictional Resistance Equivalent of Straight Pipe' No. 002 Actual Elbows Straight Tee No.001 No.003 Nominal Outside Size Diameter 90° Elbow 45° Elbow Branch Run inches inches feet feet feet feet DN mm meters meters meters meters 1 '/4 1.660 - - DN32 42.4 - - 1 '/2 1.900 - - - DN40 48.3 - - - 2 2.375 3.5 1.8 8.5 3.5 DN50 60.3 1.1 0.5 2.6 1.1 21/2 2.875 4.3 2.2 10.8 4.3 73.0 1.3 0.7 3.3 1.3 3.000 4.5 2.3 11.0 4.5 DN65 76.1 1.4 0.7 3.4 1.4 3 3.500 5.0 2.6 13.0 5.0 DN80 88.9 1.5 0.8 4.0 1.5 4.250 6.4 3.2 15.3 6.4 108.0 2.0 0.9 4.7 2.0 4 4.500 6.8 3.4 16.0 6.8 DN100 114.3 2.1 1.0 4.9 2.1 5 5.563 8.5 4.2 21.0 8.5 141.3 2.6 1.3 6.4 2.6 5.500 8.3 4.1 20.6 8.3 DN125 139.7 2.5 1.3 6.3 2.5 6.250 9.4 4.9 25.0 9.6 158.8 2.9 1.5 7.6 2.9 6 6.625 10.0 5.0 25.0 10.0 DN 150 168.3 3.0 1.5 7.6 3.0 _ 6.500 9.8 4.9 24.5 9.8 165.1 3.0 1.5 7.5 3.0 8 8.625 13.0 5.0 33.0 13.0 DN200 219.1 4.0 1.5 10.1 4.0 8.515 13.0 - 33.0 13.0 216.3 4.0 10.1 4.0 1 The flow data listed is based upon the pressure drop of Schedule 40 pipe. 10.03 1539 Rev N Updated 09/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com ✓ctaulic® victaulic.com 6.0 NOTIFICATIONS General Notes NOTE: When assembling Fire Lock EZTM couplings onto end caps, take additional care to make certain the end cap is fully seated against the gasket end stop. For Fire Lock EZTM Style 009N/009H couplings, use FireLockTm No. 006 end caps containing the "EZ" marking on the inside face or No. 60 end caps containing the "QV EZ" marking on the inside face. Non-Victaulic end cap products shall not be used with Style 009/009V/009H/009N couplings. 7.0 REFERENCE MATERIALS 10.64: Victaulic@ FireLockTm Rigid Coupling Style 009N 10.02: Victaulic@ Firel-ockTm Rigid Coupling Style 005H with Vic-PIusTm Gasket System 29.01: Victaulic® Terms and Conditions of Sale User Responsibility for Product Selection and Suitability Note Each user bears final responsibility for making a determination as to the suitability of This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products Victaulic products for a particular end -use application, in accordance with industry to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. standards and project specifications, and the applicable building codes and related Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard regulations as well as Victaulic performance, maintenance, safety, and warning equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. instructions. Nothing in this or any other document, nor any verbal recommendation, Installation advice, or opinion from any Victaulic employee, shall be deemed to alter, vary, supersede, Reference should always be made to the Victaulic installation handbook or installation or waive any provision of Victaulic Company's standard conditions of sale, installation instructions of the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment guide, or this disclaimer. of Victaulic products, providing complete installation and assembly data, and are available Intellectual Property Rights in PDF format on our website at www.victaulic.com. No statement contained herein concerning a possible or suggested use of any material, Warranty product, service, or design is intended, or should be constructed, to grant any license Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. under any patent or other intellectual property right of Victaulic or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates covering such use or design, or as a recommendation for the use of such Trademarks material, product, service, or design in the infringement of any patent or other intellectual Victaulic and all other Victaulic marks are the trademarks or registered trademarks of property right. The terms "Patented" or "Patent Pending" refer to design or utility patents Victaulic Company, and/or its affiliated entities, in the U.S. and/or other countries. or patent applications for articles and/or methods of use in the United States and/or other countries. 10.03 1539 Rev N Updated 09/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 4 ✓ctaill Victaulic° Grooved End Fittings ✓ctaulic 07.01 No. 20 Tee No. 10 Elbow 1.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Available Sizes • 3/4 — 60"/DN20 — DN1500 Maximum Working Pressure • Pressure ratings for Victaulic standard fittings conform to the ratings of Victaulic Style 177N couplings (refer to publication 06.24 for more information). Application • Connects pipe, provides change in direction and adapts sizes or components • Supplied with Victaulic OGS grooves • Exclusively for use with Victaulic couplings, valves, accessories and pipe which feature ends formed with the Victaulic OGS groove profile Pipe Materials • Carbon steel or stainless steel NOTE • These fittings are not intended for use with Victaulic plain end couplings. Intended for use only in grooved piping systems. When connecting wafer or lug type butterfly valves directly to Victaulic fittings using Style 741 or Style 743 flange adapters, be sure to check disc clearance dimensions with I.D. dimension of fitting. ALWAYS REFER TO ANY NOTIFICATIONS AT THE END OF THIS DOCUMENT REGARDING PRODUCT INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR SUPPORT. System No. Location Submitted By Date U44211lir rnm Spec Section Paragraph Approved Date 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. 1 ✓ctaullc' victaulic.com 1.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION (Continued) Other Fitting Styles %r 6 14V AGS - Advanced Groove System from 14 — 60YDN350 — DN1500 Ductile Iron for AWWA size pipe Pi hlicatinn 20 05 Pi ihliratinn 2.� n5 61 olk Stainless Steel Publication 17.16 XL fittings for abrasive services Puhlicatinn 07.07 Galvanized Publication 07.01 for Original Groove Fittings Publication 20.05 for AGS Fittings Aluminum Puhlicatinn'2l _03 9r Extra Heavy EndSeal "ES" Publication 07.03 %3pr Shouldered Ends Publication 07.06 Copper Publication 22.04 Plain End Publication 14.04 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 2 ✓ctsuliic' victaulic.com 2.0 CERTIFICATION/LISTINGS c 9 ,s < FM l l TP LPCB VdS LISTED NOTES • When supplied as "hot dip galvanized" the following fittings are UL Classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 and for use on cold +86°F/+30°C potable water service and ANSI/NSF 372: No. 10 90' Elbow, No. 11 45' Elbow, No. 12 22 V? Elbow, No. 13 11'/a° Elbow, No. 100 90' Long Radius Elbow, No. 110 45' Long Radius Elbow, No. 20 Tee, No. 25 Tee with Grooved Branch, No. 30 45' Lateral, No. 60 Cap, No. 50 Concentric Reducers, No. 51 Eccentric Reducers. • The following Victaulic fittings are VdS approved: No.10 90' Elbow, No.11 45' Elbow, No.20 Tee and No.60 Cap. • The following Victaulic fittings are LPCB approved: No.10 90' Elbow, No.11 45' Elbow, No.12 22 1/2 Elbow, No.13 11 1/4' Elbow, No.30 450 Lateral, No.30-R Reducing Lateral, No.100 Long Radius Elbow, No.110 Long Radius Elbow, No.20 Tee, No.35 Cross, No.60 Cap, No.25 Reducing Tee, No.33 True Wye, No.50 Concentric Reducer, No.51 Eccentric Reducer and No.291M Tee with Threaded Branch. • The following Victaulic fittings are FM approved: No.10 90' Elbow, Noll 45' Elbow, No.12 22 V2 Elbow, No.13 111/4' Elbow, No.30 45' Lateral, No.100 Long Radius Elbow, No.20 Tee, No.35 Cross, No.60 Cap, No.25 Reducing Tee and No.50 Concentric Reducer. 3.0 SPECIFICATIONS - MATERIAL Fitting: (specify choice) ❑ Standard: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. ❑ Optional: Segmentally welded steel as shown under nipples Nipples: (specify choice) ❑ 3/4 - 47DN20 - DN100: Carbon steel, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM A53, Type F ❑ 5 - 67DN125 - DN150: Carbon steel, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Gr. B ❑ 8 - 12"/DN200 - DN300: Carbon steel, Schedule 30 or 40, conforming to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Gr. B Flanged Adapter Nipples: (specify choice) " Class 125 Flange: Cast iron conforming to ANSI 1316.1 ❑ Class 150 Flange: Carbon steel conforming to ANSI B16.5, raised or flat face ❑ Class 300 Flange: Carbon steel conforming to ANSI B16.5, raised or flat face Fitting Coating: (specify choice) ❑ Standard: Orange enamel ❑ Optional: Hot dip galvanized and others. Some fittings supplied electroplated as standard - see product specifications Flanged Adapter Nipple Coating: (specify choice) ❑ Standard: None (Unfinished) ❑ Optional: Orange enamel, hot dip galvanized and others 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtaulir_rnm 3 'Actsulicr victaulic.com 4.0 DIMENSIONS Elbows No. 10 90' Elbow No. 11 45' Elbow No. 12 221/2' Elbow No. 13 111/4 Elbow CtoE� No. 100 90' Long _ _ Radius Elbow No. 110 45' Long to E Radius Elbow C�E CtoE� C tonE C to E 0-0 Standard and GSNK -CtoE-1 CtoE\ i I No.100 No.110 7--L' No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 90° Long Radius 45° Long Radius 90' Elbow 45' Elbow 221/i Elbow 111/4° Elbow Elbow Elbow Actual Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Outside Wgt. Wgt. Wgt. Wgt. Wgt. Wgt. Nominal Diameter C to E (Each) C to E (Each) C to E (Each) C to E (Each) C to E (Each) C to E (Each) inches inches inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb DN mm mm kg mm kg mm kg 1.63 (sw) mm kg mm kg mm kg 3/4 1.050 2.25 0.5 1.50 0.5 1.38 (sw) 2.50 (sw) 0.4 1.88 (sw) 0.3 DN20 26.9 57 0.2 38 0.2 _ 41 35 _ 64 0.2 48 0.1 1 1.315 2.25 0.6 1.75 0.6 3.251 0.6 1.38 (sw) 0.3 2.88 (sw) 0.6 2.25 (sw) 0.5 DN25 33.7 57 0.3 44 0.3 83 0.3 35 0.1 73 0.3 57 0.2 1 1/4 1.660 2.75 1.0 1.75 0.9 1.75 0.8 1.38 (sw) 0.5 3.25 (sw) 1.1 2.38 (sw) 0.7 DN32 42.4 70 0.5 44 0.4 44 0.4 35 0.2 83 0.5 60 0.3 1 1/2 1.900 2.75 1.2 1.75 0.9 1.75 0.8 1.38 (sw) 0.5 3.63 (sw) 2.2 2.50 (sw) 1.3 DN40 48.3 70 0.5 44 0.4 44 0.4 35 0.2 92 1.0 64 0.6 2 2.375 3.25 1.8 2.00 1.3 1.88 1.2 1.38 1.0 4.38 2.5 2.75 1.8 DN50 60.3 83 0.8 51 0.6 48 0.5 35 0.5 111 1.1 70 0.8 21/2 2.875 3.75 3.2 2.25 2.2 4.001 2.3 1.50 1.1 5.13 3.4 3.00 2.8 73.0 95 1.5 57 1.0 102 1.0 38 0.5 130 1.5 76 1.3 3.000 3.75 3.7 2.25 3.4 2.25 1.50 DN65 76.1 95 1.7 57 1.5 57 38 3 3.500 4.25 4.5 2.50 3.1 4.501 3.1 1.50 2.1 5.88 6.0 3.38 4.9 DN80 88.9 108 2.0 64 1.4 114 1.4 38 1.0 149 2.7 86 2.2 3 1/2 4.000 4.50 5.6 2.75 4.3 2.50 (sw) 4.0 1.75 (sw) 2.7 DN90 101.6 114 2.5 70 2.0 64 1.8 44 1.2 4 4.500 5.00 7.1 3.00 5.6 2.88 5.6 1.75 3.6 7.50 12.3 4.00 7.3 DN100 114.3 127 3.2 76 2.5 73 2.5 44 1.6 191 5.6 102 3.3 4.250 5.00 11.0 3.00 5.6 108.0 127 5.0 76 2.5 5.000 5.25 (sw) 10.0 3.13 (sw) 6.0 3.50 (sw) 6.6 1.88 (sw) 4.2 127.0 133 4.5 79 2.7 89 3.0 48 1.9 5 5.563 5.50 11.7 3.25 8.3 2.88 (sw) 7.8 2.00 (sw) 5.0 9.25 (sw) 18.0 4.88 (sw) 14.8 141.3 140 5.50 1 5.3 83 3.8 73 3.5 51 2.2 235 8.2 124 6.7 5.250 11.7 3.25 8.3 133.0 140 5.3 83 3.8 5.500 5.50 11.7 3.25 8.3 2.88 2.00 DN125 139.7 140 5.3 83 3.8 73 _ 51 6 6.625 6.50 17.2 3.50 10.8 6.251 12.2 2.00 7.0 10.75 30.4 5.50 17.4 DN150 168.3 165 7.8 89 4.9 159 5.5 51 3.2 273 13.8 140 7.9 6.250 6.50 18.6 3.50 10.8 159.0 165 8.4 89 4.9 6.500 6.50 15.5 3.50 9.8 3.13 11.4 2.00 7.4 10.75 (sw) 29.0 5.50 (sw) 19.0 165.1 165 7.0 89 4.4 79 5.2 51 3.4 273 13.2 140 8.6 1 Gooseneck design, end -to -end dimension fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtaulir_rnnn M 'A CtaUllicr virtaidir rnm 4.0 DIMENSIONS (Continued) Elbows No. 10 90' Elbow No. 11 45' Elbow No. 12 221/2 Elbow No. 13 111/a° Elbow ctoF No. 100 90' Long Radius Elbow -o No. 110 45' Long to E Radius Elbow C to E� CtoE C o tE `0 Standard and GSNK -CtoE� I r\ CtoE I I No.100 No.110 No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 90' Long Radius 45' Long Radius Size 90' Elbow 45' Elbow 221/2° Elbow 111/4' Elbow Elbow Elbow _ Actual Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Outside Wgt. Wgt. Wgt. wgt. Wgt. Wgt. Nominal Diameter C to E (Each) C to E (Each) C to E Each C to E (Each) C to E (Each) C to E (Each) inches inches inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb DN mm mm kg mm kg mm kg mm kg mm kg mm kg 8 8.625 7.75 29.9 4.25 20.4 7.751 20.0 W2.00 10.1 14.25 66.0 7.25 36.0 DN200 219.1 197 13.6 108 9.3 197 9.1 51 4.6 362 30.0 184 16.3 10 10.750 9.00 63.3 4.75 37.5 4.38 (sw) 30.0 2.13 11.8 15.00 107.0 6.25 57.0 DN250 273.0 229 28.7 121 17.0 ill 13.6 54 53 381 48.5 159 25.9 12 12.750 10.00 74.0 5.25 66.7 4.88 (sw) 40.0 2.25 29.3 18.00 156.0 7.50 90.0 DN300 323.9 254 33.6 133 30.3 124 18.1 57 13.3 457 70.8 191 40.8 142 14.000 14.00 136.0 5.75 65.0 5.00 (sw) 46.0 3.50 (sw) 32.0 21.00 (s) 164.0 8.75 82.0 DN350 355.6 356 61.7 146 29.5 127 20.9 89 14.5 533 74.4 222 37.2 14.843 14.84 149.3 6.13 82.0 377.0 377 67.7 156 37.2 162 16.000 16.00 171.0 6.63 88.0 5.00 (sw) 58.0 4.00 (sw) 42.0 24.00 (s) 210.0 10.00 (s) 100.0 DN400 406.5 406 77.6 168 39.3 127 26.3 102 19.1 610 95.3 254 45.4 16.773 16.75 198.6 7.00 101.3 426.0 425 90.1 178 45.9 182 18.000 18.00 228.0 7.50 108.0 5.50 (sw) 65.0 4.50 (sw) 53.2 27.00 (s) 273.0 11.25 (s) 135.0 DN450 457.2 457 103.4 190 50.0 140 29.5 144 24.1 686 123.8 286 61.2 18.898 18.88 291.0 7.83 141.7 480.0 480 132.0 200 64.3 202 20.000 20.00 298.0 8.25 138.0 6.00 (sw) 78.6 5.00 (sw) 65.0 30.00 (s) 343.0 12.50 (s) 174.0 DN500 508.0 508 135.2 210 62.6 152 36.0 127 29.5 762 155.6 318 78.9 20.866 20.88 355.0 8.63 179.0 530.0 530 161.0 219 81.2 242 24.000 24.00 438.0 10.00 221.0 7.00 (sw) 140.0 6.00 (sw) 60.0 36.00 (s) 516.0 15.00 (s) 251.0 DN600 609.6 610 198.7 254 100.2 178 63.5 152 27.2 914 234.1 381 113.9 24.803 24.80 545.0 10.25 255.2 630.0 630 247.2 261 115.7 14-60 For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 DN350 - DN 1500 q 65 " v 1 Gooseneck design, end -to -end dimension fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. 2 For 14YDN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtaulir_rnm 5 'A CtaUllicr victaulic.com 4.1 DIMENSIONS Reducing Base Support Elbow No. R-10G Grv. x Grv. No. R-10F Grv. x Flange cA CtoE-�CtoE H B Dia. B Dia. No. R-10 Size Reducing Base Support Elbow Approx. Weight Each C to E H B Diameter Nominal Grv. x Grv. Grv. x Flange inches inches inches inches lb lb DN mm mm mm kg kg 6 4 9.00 1.25 1.50 19.0 33.0 DN150 x DN100 229 32 38 8.6 15.0 9.00 1.50 1.50 23.0 5 38.0 229 38 38 10.4 17.2 8 6 10.50 2.13 1.50 33.0 52.0 DN200 x DN150 267 24 38 15.0 23.6 10 8 12.00 2.40 1.50 61.0 88.0 DN250 x DN200 305 61 38 27.7 39.9 4.2 DIMENSIONS Adapter Elbow No. 18 90' Adapter Elbow No. 19 45' Adapter Elbow C to GE C to',,\ GE C to TE C to L TE No. 18 No. 19 Size 900 Adapter Elbow 450 Adapter Elbow Approximate Approx. Actual Outside Weight Weight Nominal Diameter C to GE C to TE (Each) C to GE C to TE (Each) inches inches inches inches lb inches inches lb DN mm mm mm kg mm mm kg 3/4 1.050 2.25 2.25 0.5 1.50 1.50 0.5 DN20 26.9 57 57 0.2 38 38 0.2 1 1.315 2.25 2.25 0.5 DN25 33.7 57 57 0.2 11/4 1.660 2.75 2.75 0.9 DN32 42.4 70 70 0.4 1'/2 1.900 2.75 2.75 1.1 1.75 1.75 0.9 DN40 48.3 70 70 0.5 44 44 0.4 2 2.375 3.25 4.25 2.5 DN50 60.3 83 108 1.1 21/2 2.875 3.75 3.75 3.0 2.25 2.25 2.3 73.0 95 95 1.4 57 57 1.0 3 3.500 4.25 6.00 5.8 2.50 4.25 5.0 DN80 88.9 108 152 2.6 64 108 2.3 31/2 4.000 4.50 6.25 8.0 5.25 5.25 8.8 DN90 101.6 114 159 3.6 133 133 4.0 6 6.625 6.50 6.50 17.6 3.50 3.50 12.7 DN150 168.3 165 165 8.0 89 89 5.8 NOTE • Available with British Standard Pipe Threads, specify "BSP" clearly on order. 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtaidir_rnnn 0 Aicctsullicr victaulic.com 4.3 DIMENSIONS Tees, Crosses and True Wyes n-CtoE� i-CtoEi j U'E. 0 to LE C to �GE� I Ct o 2CtoTE No.20 No.35 No.33 No.29M Size Tee Approx. Cross (sw) Approx. True Wye (sw) Approx. Tee with Threaded Branch Approx. Actual Outside Weight Weight Weight Weight Nominal Dimeter C to E (Each) C to E (Each) C to LE C to SE (Each) C to GE C to TE (Each) inches inches inches lb inches lb inches inches lb inches inches lb DN mm mm kg I mm kg mm mm kg I mm mm kg 3/4 1.050 2.25 0.6 2.25 0.9 2.25 2.00 0.7 2.25 2.25 (sw) 0.6 DN20 26.9 57 0.3 57 0.4 57 51 0.3 57 57 0.3 1 1.315 2.25 1.0 2.25 1.3 2.25 2.25 1.1 2.25 2.25 1.0 DN25 33.7 57 0.5 57 0.6 57 57 0.5 57 57 0.5 11/4 1.660 2.75 1.5 2.75 2.1 2.75 2.50 1.5 2.75 2.75 1.5 DN32 42.4 70 0.7 70 1.0 70 64 0.7 70 70 0.7 11/2 1.900 2.75 2.0 2.75 2.5 2.75 2.75 1.8 2.75 2.75 2.0 DN40 48.3 70 0.9 70 1.1 70 70 0.8 70 70 0.9 2 2.375 3.25 3.0 3.25 3.8 3.25 2.75 2.5 3.25 4.25 3.0 DN50 60.3 83 1.4 83 1.7 83 70 1.1 83 108 1.4 21/2 2.875 3.75 4.3 3.75 6.1 3.75 3.00 4.3 3.75 3.75 4.3 73.0 95 2.0 95 2.8 95 76 2.0 95 95 2.0 3.000 3.75 5.2 3.75 3.75 (sw) 5.2 DN65 76.1 95 2.4 _ _ _ _ _ 95 95 2.4 3 3.500 4.25 6.8 4.25 10.5 4.25 3.25 6.1 4.25 6.00 6.8 DN80 88.9 108 3.0 108 4.8 108 83 2.8 108 152 3.1 31/2 4.000 4.50 (sw) 7.9 4.50 11.5 4.50 3.50 9.6 4.50 4.50 (sw) 7.9 DN90 101.6 114 3.6 114 5.2 114 89 4.4 114 114 3.6 4.250 5.00 15.5 5.00 5.00 (sw) 15.5 108.0 127 7.0 - - - - - 127 127 7.0 4 4.500 5.00 11.9 5.00 15.8 5.00 3.75 9.8 5.00 7.25 11.9 DN100 114.3 127 5.4 127 7.2 127 95 4.4 127 184 5.4 5.000 5.25 (sw) 15.0 5.25 18.5 5.25 5.25 (sw) 15.0 127.0 133 6.8 133 1 8.4 133 133 6.8 5.250 5.50 17.8 5.50 5.50 (sw) 17.8 133.0 140 8.1 _ _ _ _ _ 140 140 8.1 5.500 5.50 17.8 5.50 5.50 (sw) 17.8 DN125 139.7 140 8.1 _ _ _ _ _ 140 140 8.1 5 5.563 5.50 17.8 5.50 20.0 5.50 4.00 15.0 5.50 5.50 (sw) 17.8 141.3 140 8.1 140 9.1 140 102 6.8 140 140 8.1 6.250 6.50 27.1 6.50 6.50 (sw) 27.1 159.0 165 12.3 _ _ _ _ _ 165 165 12.3 6.500 6.50 22.0 6.50 28.0 6.50 6.50 (sw) 22.0 165.1 165 10.0 165 12.7 _ _ _ 165 165 10.0 6 6.625 6.50 25.7 6.50 28.0 6.50 4.50 22.3 6.50 6.50 (sw) 25.7 DN 150 168.3 165 11.7 165 12.7 165 114 10.1 165 165 11.7 8 8.625 7.75 47.6 7.75 48.0 7.75 6.00 36.0 7.75 7.75 47.6 DN200 219.1 197 21.6 197 21.8 197 152 16.3 197 197 21.6 10 10.750 9.00 99.0 9.00 121.5 9.00 6.50 69.9 9.00 9.00 99.0 DN250 273.0 229 44.9 229 55.1 229 155 31.7 229 229 44.9 12 12.750 10.00 133.0 10.00 110.0 10.00 7.00 80.0 10.00 10.00 133.0 DN300 323.9 254 60.3 254 49.9 254 178 36.3 254 254 60.3 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 7 'Actsulicr victaulic.com 4.3 DIMENSIONS (Continued) Tees, Crosses and True Wyes n-CtoE� h-CtoEi IE 27. C to LE C to �GE� I Ct o 2CtoTE No.20 No.35 No.33 No.29M Size Tee Cross (sw) True Wye (sw) Tee with Threaded Branch Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Actual Outside Weight Weight Weight Weight Nominal Dimeter C to E (Each) C to E (Each) C to LE C to SE (Each) C to GE C to TE (Each) inches inches inches lb inches lb inches inches lb inches inches lb DIN mm mm kg mm kg mm mm kg mm mm kg 142 14.000 11.00 (sw) 145.0 11.00 198.0 11.00 7.50 134.2 DN350 355.6 279 65.8 145.0 279 89.8 279 191 60.8 377.0 11.50 292 65.8 162 16.000 12.00 (sw) 186.0 12.00 250.0 12.00 8.00 167.0 DN400 406.4 305 84.4 305 113.4 305 203 75.7 426.0 13.00 186.0 300 84.4 182 18.000 15.50 (sw) 260.0 15.50 350.0 15.50 8.50 234.0 DN450 457.0 394 117.9 394 158.8 394 216 106.1 480.0 14.63 256.0 372 116.1 202 20.000 17.25 (sw) 336.0 17.25 452.0 17.25 9.00 281.0 DN500 508.0 438 152.4 438 205.0 438 229 127.5 15.38 (sw) 339.0 530.0 391 153.8 242 24.000 20.00 (sw) 592.0 20.00 795.0 20.00 10.00 523.0 DN600 610.0 508 268.5 508 360.6 508 254 237.2 Aft 17.38 (sw) 473.0 630.0 441 214.5 For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 14-60 DN350 - DN 1500 A 65 . V 2 For 14"/DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com Actsulicr victaulic.com 4.4 DIMENSIONS Reducing Tee No. 25 Grooved Branch No. 29T Threaded Branch �CtoE H CtoE� I 1 T c C to to E E No. 25 No. 29T No. 29T No. 25 w/ Thd. Size Std. Branch Approx. Weight Nominal C to E C to E (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 1 DN25 x 1 DN25 3/42.25 x DN20 (sw) 57 2.25 (sw) 57 1.0 0.5 1 1/a DN32 x 1 1/41 DN32 x DN25 2.75 (sw) 70 2.75 (sw) 70 1.3 0.6 1 'h DN40 x 1 '/z DN40 3/42.75 x DN20 (sw) 70 2.75 (sw) 70 1.5 0.7 2.75 (sw) 2.75 (sw) 1.5 1 DN25 70 70 0.7 2.75 (sw) 2.75 (sw) 1.7 1 1/a DN32 70 70 0.8 2 DN50 x 2 DN50 3/a x DN20 3.25 83 3.25 83 2.5 1.1 3.25 3.25 2.7 1 DN25 83 83 1.2 3.25 (sw) 3.25 (sw) 1.8 1 1/a DN32 83 83 0.8 3.25 3.25 (sw) 3.0 1 1/2 DN40 83 83 1.4 21/2 x 2'/2 x 3/a 3.75 (sw) 3.75 (sw) 3.9 DN20 95 95 1.8 3.75 3.75 (sw) 3.8 1 DN25 95 95 1.7 3.75 3.75 4.2 11/a DN32 95 95 1.7 3.75 3.75 3.9 11/2 DN40 95 95 1.8 3.75 3.75 (sw) 4.5 2 DN50 95 95 2.0 3 DN80 x 3 DN80 3/44.25 x DN20 (sw) 108 4.25 (sw) 108 5.7 2.6 4.25 4.25 6.1 1 DN25 108 108 2.8 4.25 4.25 8.0 11/a DN32 108 108 3.6 4.25 4.25 (sw) 6.5 1 1/2 DN40 108 108 2.9 4.25 4.25 (sw) 6.2 2 DN50 108 108 2.8 4.25 4.25 (sw) 6.4 21/2 108 108 2.9 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • Cast fitting available. Contact Victaulic for details. CtoE»I I I 1 { C to E No. 25 CtoE� I 4--- C to E No. 29T No. 29T No. 25 w/ Thd. Size Std. Branch Approx. Weight Nominal C to E C to E (Each) inches inches inches I DIN mm mm kg 4 DN100 x 4 DN100 x 3/45.00 DN20 (sw) 127 5.00 (sw) 127 8.0 3.6 5.00 5.00 7.8 1 DN25 127 127 3.5 5.00 (sw) 5.00 (sw) 9.6 1 1/a DN32 127 127 4.4 5.00 5.00 10.2 1 '/2 DN40 127 127 4.6 5.00 5.00 11.2 2 DN50 127 127 5.1 5.00 2'/2 5.00 11.4 127 127 5.2 5.00 5.00 11.6 3 DN80 127 127 5.3 5 x 5 x 1 5.50 (sw) 5.50 (sw) 14.0 DN25 140 140 6.4 5.50 (sw) 5.50 (sw) 14.3 1 1/2 DN40 140 140 6.5 5.50 (sw) 5.50 (sw) 14.5 2 DN50 140 140 6.6 5.50 5.50 (sw) 15.2 21/2 140 140 6.9 5.50 5.50 (sw) 16.6 3 DN80 140 140 7.5 5.50 5.50 (sw) 16.7 4 DN100 140 140 7.6 6 DN150 x 6 DN150 x 1 DN25 6.50 (sw) 165 6.50 (sw) 165 23.0 10.4 6.50 (sw) 6.50 (sw) 24.0 1 1/2 DN40 165 165 10.9 6.50 6.50 21.6 2 DN50 165 165 9.8 6.50 6.50 21.4 21/2 165 165 11.7 6.50 6.50 26.5 3 DN80 165 165 12.0 6.50 6.50 25.0 4 DN100 165 165 11.3 6.50 6.50 23.2 5 165 165 10.5 61/2 x 61/2 x 3 6.50 6.50 (sw) 24.0 DN80 165 165 10.9 6.50 6.50 (sw) 25.0 4 DN100 165 165 11.3 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • Cast fitting available. Contact Victaulic for details. 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtaidir_rnm 9 Aicctsulicr victaulic.com 4.4 DIMENSIONS (Continued) Reducing Tee No. 25 Grooved Branch No. 29T Threaded Branch �CtoE H CtoE� I 1 T c C to to E E No. 25 No. 29T No. 29T No. 25 w/ Thd. Size Std. Branch Approx. Weight Nominal C to E C to E (Each) inches inches inches lb DIN mm mm kg 8 DN200 8 x DN200 x 1 1/2 DN40 7.75 (sw) 197 7.75 (sw) 197 33.0 15.0 7.75 (sw) 7.75 (sw) 33.5 2 DN50 197 197 15.2 7.75 (sw) 7.75 (sw) 39.0 21/2 197 197 17.7 7.75 (sw) 7.75 (sw) 33.6 3 DN80 197 197 15.2 7.75 7.75 41.8 4 DN100 197 197 19.0 7.75 (sw) 7.75 (sw) 34.0 5 197 197 15.4 7.75 7.75 42.3 6 DN150 197 197 19.2 7.75 (sw) 197 7.75 (sw) 197 48.0 21.8 165.1 mm 10 DN250 10 x DN250 x 11/2 DN40 9.00 229 9.00 229 62.0 28.1 9.00 (sw) 9.00 (sw) 62.0 2 DN50 229 229 28.1 9.00 (sw) 9.00 (sw) 62.4 21/2 229 229 28.3 9.00 (sw) 9.00 (sw) 60.0 3 DN80 229 229 27.2 9.00 (sw) 9.00 (sw) 61.0 4 DN100 229 229 27.7 5 9.00 (sw) 9.00 (sw) 52.0 229 229 23.6 9.00 (sw) 9.00 (sw) 59.0 6 DN150 229 229 26.8 9.00 (sw) 9.00 (sw) 64.7 8 DN200 229 229 29.3 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • Cast fitting available. Contact Victaulic for details. CtoE»I I I 1 { C to E No. 25 CtoE� I 4--- C to E No. 29T No. 29T No. 25 w/ Thd. Size Std. Branch Approx. Weight Nominal C to E C to E (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 12 12 1 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 77.0 DN300 x DN300 x DN25 254 254 34.9 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 80.0 2 DN50 254 254 36.3 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 78.0 21/2 254 254 35.4 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 82.0 3 DN80 254 254 37.2 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 80.0 4 DN100 254 254 36.3 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 75.0 5 254 254 34.0 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 75.0 6 DN150 254 254 34.0 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 80.0 8 DN200 254 254 36.3 10.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 84.0 10 DN250 254 254 38.1 142 DN350 x 14 DN350 x 4 DN100 11.00 (sw) 279 11.00 (sw) 279 102.0 46.3 11.00 (sw) 11.00 (sw) 108.2 6 DN150 279 279 49.1 11.00 11.00 112.0 8 DN200 279 279 50.8 11.00 11.00 120.0 10 DN250 279 279 54.4 11.00 11.00 129.1 12 DN300 279 279 58.6 162 DN400 x 16 DN400 x 4 DN100 12.00 305 12.00 305 130.0 59.0 12.00 (sw) 12.00 (sw) 133.5 6 DN150 305 305 60.6 12.00 12.00 145.0 8 DN200 305 305 65.8 12.00 12.00 149.5 10 DN250 305 305 67.8 12.00 12.00 154.0 12 DN300 305 305 69.9 12.00 (sw) 167.0 14 DN350 305 _ 75.8 2 For 14YDN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • Cast fitting available. Contact Victaulic for details. 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtai dir_rnm 10 Aicctsulicr victaulic.com 4.4 DIMENSIONS (Continued) Reducing Tee No. 25 Grooved Branch No. 29T Threaded Branch �CtoE H CtoE� I 1 T c C to to E E No. 25 No. 29T No. 29T No. 25 w/ Thd. Size Std. Branch Approx. Weight Nominal C to E C to E (Each) inches inches inches I DIN mm mm kg 182 18 4 15.50 (sw) 15.50 (sw) 194.0 DN450 x DN450 x DN100 394 394 88.0 15.50 (sw) 15.50 (sw) 200.0 6 DN150 394 394 90.7 15.50 (sw) 15.50 (sw) 202.0 8 DN200 394 394 91.6 15.50 15.50 212.0 10 DN250 394 394 96.2 15.50 15.50 222.6 12 DN300 394 394 101.0 15.50 230.1 14 DN350 394 _ 104.4 15.50 247.6 16 DN400 394 _ 112.3 202 20 6 17.25 17.25 240.0 DN500 x DN500 x DN150 438 438 108.9 17.25 17.25 244.0 8 DN200 438 438 110.7 17.25 17.25 256.0 10 DN250 438 438 116.1 17.25 17.25 264.0 12 DN300 438 438 119.8 17.25 275.0 14 DN350 438 _ 124.7 17.25 288.6 16 DN400 438 _ 130.9 17.25 297.0 18 DN450 438 _ 134.7 2 For 14YDN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • Cast fitting available. Contact Victaulic for details. CtoE»I I I 1 { C to E No. 25 CtoE� I 4--- C to E No. 29T No. 29T No. 25 w/ Thd. Size Std. Branch Approx. Weight Nominal C to E C to E (Each) inches inches inches I DN mm mm kg 242 24 8 DN600 x DN600 x DN200 20.00 508 20.00 508 340.0 154.2 20.00 20.00 343.9 10 DN250 508 508 156.0 20.00 20.00 352.8 12 DN300 508 508 160.0 20.00 360.0 14 DN350 508 _ 163.3 20.00 378.0 16 DN400 508 _ 171.5 20.00 380.0 18 DN450 508 _ 172.4 20.00 373.0 20 DN500 508 _ 169.2 For AGS fitting information, see 14 - 60 publication 20.05 DN350 -1500 AGS.. 2 For 147DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTES • No. 29T Threaded Outlet Reducing Tees are supplied NPT and are available with British Standard threads. For British Standard specify "BSP" clearly on order. • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). • Cast fitting available. Contact Victaulic for details. 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtaulir_rnm 11 Aicctsulicr victaulic.com 4.5 DIMENSIONS Bull Plug No. 61 r — No. 61 No. 61 Size Bull Plug (s) Actual Approx. Outside Weight Nominal Diameter E to E (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 2 2.375 4.00 2.5 DN50 60.3 102 1.1 21/2 2.875 5.00 3.0 73.0 127 1.4 3 3.500 6.00 4.5 DN80 88.9 152 2.0 4 4.500 7.00 7.5 DN100 114.3 178 3.4 5 5.563 8.00 12.0 141.3 203 5.4 6 6.625 10.00 17.0 DN150 168.5 254 7.7 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTES • Steel dish caps available through 24YDN600, contact Victaulic. • No. 61 Bull Plugs should be used in vacuum service with Style 72 or 750 couplings. • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 12 'A CtaUllicr victaulic.com 4.6 DIMENSIONS 45' Lateral No. 30 i C to LE j C to L� S,E No. 30 No. 30 Size 45° Lateral Weight Actual Outside Approx. Nominal Diameter C to LE C to SE (Each) inches inches inches inches lb DIN mm mm mm kg 3/4 1.050 4.50 (sw) 2.00 (sw) 1.0 DN20 26.9 114 51 0.5 1 1.315 5.00 (sw) 2.25 (sw) 1.7 DN25 33.7 127 57 0.8 11/4 1.660 5.75 2.50 2.5 (d) DN32 42.4 146 64 1.1 11/2 1.900 6.25 (sw) 2.75 (sw) 3.5 DN40 48.3 159 70 1.6 2 2.375 7.00 (sw) 2.75 (sw) 5.0 DN50 60.3 178 70 2.3 21/2 2.875 7.75 (sw) 3.00 (sw) 9.0 73.0 197 76 4.1 3.000 8.50 (sw) 3.25 (sw) 11.0 DN65 76.1 216 83 5.0 3 3.500 8.50 3.25 11.7 (d) DN80 88.9 216 83 5.4 31/2 4.000 10.00 (sw) 3.50 (sw) 17.8 DN90 101.6 254 89 8.1 4 4.500 10.50 3.75 22.2 (d) DN100 114.3 267 95 10.1 5 5.563 12.50 (sw) 4.00 (sw) 21.8 141.3 318 102 9.9 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded i C to j LE j No. 30 No. 30 Size 45' Lateral Weight Actual Outside Approx. Nominal Diameter C to LE C to SE (Each) inches inches inches inches lb DIN mm mm I mm kq I 6.500 14.00 (sw) 4.50 (sw) 43.6 165.1 356 114 19.8 6 6.625 14.00 (sw) 4.50 (sw) 43.6 DN150 168.3 356 114 49.8 8 8.625 18.00 (sw) 6.00 (sw) 72.0 DN200 219.1 457 152 32.7 10 10.750 20.50 (sw) 6.50 (sw) 105.0 DN250 273.0 521 165 47.6 12 12.750 23.00 (sw) 7.00 (sw) 165.0 DN300 323.9 584 178 74.8 142 14.000 26.50 (sw) 7.50 (sw) 276.0 DN350 355.6 673 191 125.2 162 16.000 29.00 (sw) 8.00 (sw) 344.2 DN400 406.4 737 203 156.1 182 18.000 32.00 (sw) 8.50 (sw) 429.0 DN450 457.0 813 216 194.6 202 20.000 35.00 (sw) 9.00 (sw) 500.0 DN500 508.0 889 229 226.8 242 24.000 40.00 (sw) 10.00 (sw) 715.0 DN600 610.0 1016 254 324.3 For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 14-60 DN350 - ON 1500 AGS V 2 For 147DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtairlir_rnm 13 'A CtaUllicr 4.7 DIMENSIONS 45' Reducing Lateral No. 30-R Size Nominal inches DN 3 3 2 DN80 x DN80 x DN50 21/2 4 4 2 DN100 x DN100 x DN50 21/2 3 DN80 5 x 5 x 2 DN50 3 DN80 4 DN100 6 6 3 DN150 x DN150 x DN80 4 DN100 5 8 8 4 DN200 x DN200 x DN100 5 6 DN150 10 10 4 DN250 x DN250 x DN100 5 6 DN150 8 DN200 12 12 5 DN300 x DN300 x 6 DN150 8 DN200 10 DN250 C to LE I I/ �- C to ` o�F, C` SE ` No. 30-R No 30-R 45° Reducing Lateral Approx. Weight C to LE C to SE (Each) inches inches lb mm mm kg 8.50 3.25 9.8 216 83 4.4 8.50 3.25 9.8 216 83 4.4 10.50 3.75 10.0 267 95 4.5 10.50 3.75 10.0 267 95 4.5 10.50 3.75 18.3 267 95 8.3 12.50 4.00 24.0 318 102 10.9 12.50 4.00 27.0 318 102 12.2 12.50 4.00 26.5 318 102 12.0 14.00 4.50 37.0 356 114 16.8 14.00 4.50 36.0 356 114 16.3 14.00 4.50 44.7 356 114 20.3 18.00 6.00 62.0 457 152 28.1 18.00 6.00 75.5 457 152 34.2 18.00 6.00 82.0 457 152 37.2 20.50 6.50 104.8 521 165 47.5 20.50 6.50 99.0 521 165 44.9 20.50 6.50 105.8 521 165 48.0 20.50 6.50 118.0 521 165 53.5 23.00 7.00 122.0 584 178 55.3 23.00 7.00 137.0 584 178 62.1 23.00 7.00 147.0 584 178 66.7 23.00 7.00 167.0 584 178 75.8 i C C to LE I/ o�F. C to ` , SE ` No. 30-R No 30-R Size 45° Reducing Lateral Approx. Weight Nominal C to LE C to SE (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 141 14 4 26.50 7.50 172.0 DN350 x DN350 x DN100 673 191 78.0 26.50 7.50 187.0 6 DN150 673 191 84.8 26.50 7.50 205.8 8 DN200 673 191 93.4 26.20 7.50 235.0 10 DN250 673 191 106.6 26.50 7.50 250.0 12 ALL DN300 673 191 113.4 162 16 6 29.00 8.00 215.0 DN400 x DN400 x DN150 737 203 97.5 29.00 8.00 252.5 8 DN200 737 203 114.5 29.00 8.00 265.0 10 DN250 737 203 120.2 29.00 8.00 295.0 12 DN300 737 203 133.8 29.00 8.00 305.0 14 DN350 737 203 138.3 182 18 6 32.00 8.50 274.0 DN450 x DN450 x DN150 813 216 124.3 32.00 8.50 275.0 8 DN200 813 216 124.7 32.00 8.50 347.0 12 DN300 813 216 157.4 32.00 8.50 350.0 14 DN350 813 216 158.8 32.00 8.50 362.0 16 DN400 813 216 164.2 35.00 9.00 415.0 202 20 12 DN500 x DN500 x DN300 889 229 188.2 35.00 9.00 420.0 14 DN350 889 229 190.5 35.00 10.00 425.0 16 DN400 899 229 192.8 40.00 10.00 425.0 242 24 16 DN600 x DN600 x DN400 1016 254 192.8 40.00 10.00 570.0 20 DN600 1016 254 258.6 For AGS fitting information, 14 - 60 see publication 20.05 DN350 - DN1500 A 65'" 2 For 14"/DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 14 Aicctsullicr victaulic.com 4.8 DIMENSIONS Tee Wye No. 32 T H G No. 32 No. 32 Size Tee Wye (sw) Approx. Weight Nominal G H El E2 (Each) inches inches inches inches inches lb DIN mm mm mm mm kg 2 2 2 2.75 7.00 9.00 4.63 6.4 DN50 x DN50 x DN50 70 178 229 118 2.9 21/2 21/2 21/2 3.00 7.75 10.50 5.75 11.5 x x 76 197 267 146 5.2 3 3 3 3.25 8.50 11.50 6.50 14.3 DN80 x DN80 x DN80 83 216 292 165 6.5 31/2 31/2 31/2 3.25 10.00 13.00 7.75 22.9 DN90 x DN90 x DN90 89 254 330 197 10.4 4 4 4 3.75 10.50 13.63 8.13 26.0 100 x DN100 x DN100 95 267 346 207 11.8 5 x 5 x 5 4.00 12.50 16.13 10.00 48.0 102 318 410 254 21.8 6 6 6 4.50 14.00 18.25 11.50 60.5 DN150 x DN150 x DN150 114 356 464 292 27.4 8 8 8 6.00 18.00 23.25 15.25 127.1 DN200 x DN200 x DN200 152 457 591 387 57.7 10 10 10 6.50 20.50 27.25 18.00 190.0 DN250 x DN250 x DN250 165 521 692 457 86.2 12 12 12 7.00 23.00 31.00 20.50 240.0 DN300 x DN300 x DN300 178 584 787 521 108.9 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded 4.9 DIMENSIONS Adapter Nipple No. 4012 Grv. x Thd. No. 42 Grv. x Bev. No. 43 Grv. x Grv. EtoE No. 40 I. EtoE EtoE 11 D No.42 No.43 No. 40, 42, 43 Size Adapter Nipple (s) Approx. Actual Outside Weight Nominal Diameter E to E (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 3/4 1.050 3.00 0.3 DN20 26.9 76 0.1 1 1.315 3.00 0.4 25 33.7 76 0.2 1'/4 1.660 4.00 0.8 DN32 42.4 102 0.4 11/2 1.900 4.00 0.9 40 48.3 102 0.4 2 2.375 4.00 1.2 DN50 60.3 102 0.5 21/2 2.875 4.00 1.9 73.0 102 0.9 3 3.500 4.00 2.5 DN80 88.9 102 1.1 31/2 4.000 4.00 2.1 DN90 101.6 102 0.9 4 4.500 6.00 5.5 DN100 114.3 152 2.5 5 5.563 6.00 7.4 141.3 152 3.4 6 6.625 6.00 9.5 DN150 168.3 152 4.3 8 8.625 6.00 14.2 DN200 219.1 152 6.4 10 10.750 8.00 27.0 DN250 273.0 203 12.2 12 12.750 8.00 33.0 DN300 323.9 203 15.0 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTES • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). • For pump package nipples with 1 lh"/40 mm hole cut to receive Style 923 Vic -Let or Style 924 Vic-O-Well request special No. 40, 42 or 43 nipples and specify No. 40-H, 42-H or 43-H on order. NOTE: 4 - 12"/DN100 - DN300diameter -87200mm minimum length required. • For roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. • Available with British Standard Pipe Threads, specify "BSP" clearly on order. 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. 15 �CtaUllicr virtanlir rnm 4.10 DIMENSIONS Cap No. 60 b No. 60 No. 60 Size Cap Actual Approx. Outside Weight Nominal Diameter "T" Thickness (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 3/4 1.050 0.88 0.2 DN20 26.9 22 0.1 1 1.315 0.88 0.3 25 33.7 22 0.1 11/4 1.660 0.88 0.3 DN32 42.4 22 0.1 1'/2 1.900 0.88 0.5 DN40 48.3 22 0.2 2 2.375 0.88 0.6 DN50 60.3 22 0.3 21/2 2.875 0.88 1.0 73.0 22 0.5 3.000 0.88 1.2 DN65 76.1 22 0.5 3 3.500 0.88 1.2 DN80 88.9 22 0.5 31/2 4.000 0.88 2.5 DN90 101.6 22 1.1 4.250 1.00 2.3 108.0 25 1.0 4 4.500 1.00 2.5 DN100 114.3 25 1.1 5.250 1.00 4.5 133.0 25 2.0 5.500 1.00 4.5 DN125 139.7 25 2.0 5 5.563 1.00 4.6 141.3 25 2.1 b No. 60 No. 60 Size Cap Actual Approx. Outside Weight Nominal Diameter "T" Thickness (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 6.250 1.00 6.8 159.0 25 3.1 6.500 1.00 7.3 165.1 25 3.3 6 6.625 1.00 6.1 DN150 168.3 25 2.8 8 8.625 1.19 13.1 DN200 219.1 30 5.9 10 10.750 1.25 21.0 DN250 273.0 32 9.5 12 12.750 1.25 35.6 DN300 323.9 32 16.2 142 14.000 9.50 (s) DN350 355.6 241 + 162 16.000 10.00 (s) DN400 406.4 254 + 182 18.000 11.00 (s) DN450 457.0 279 + 202 20.000 12.00 (s) DN500 508.0 305 + 242 24.000 13.50 (s) DN600 610.0 343 + For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 14-60 DN350 - DN 1500 A 6a7 - v 2 For 14"/DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded + Contact Victaulic for details. NOTES • No. 60 cap is not suitable for use in vacuum service with Style 72 or 750 couplings. No. 61 bull plugs should be used. • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtaidir_rnm 16 'Actsulicr 4.11 DIMENSIONS Flanged Adapter Nipple No. 41 ANSI Class 125 No. 45F ANSI Class 150 Flat Face No. 45R ANSI Class 150 Raised Face No. 46F ANSI Class 300 Flat Face No. 46R ANSI Class 300 Raised Face No. 45RE PN10/PN16 Raised Face EtoE r EtoE� EtoE� r EtoE� EtoE� EtoE rn r[1 rn 0 No. 41 No. 45F No. 45R No. 46F No. 46R No. 45RE No. 41 No. 45F and No. 45R No. 46F and No. 46R ANSI 125 ANSI 150 ANSI 300 No. 45RE Size Flange Adapter Nipple Flanged Adapter Nipple (s) Flanged Adapter Nipple (s) Flanged Adapter Nipple Actual Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Outside Weight Weight Weight Weight Nominal Diameter E to E (Each) E to E (Each) E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb DN mm mm kg mm kg mm kg mm kg 3/4 1.050 3.00 3.00 2.3 3.00 3.3 DN20 26.9 76 _ 76 1.0 2.5 3.00 2.7 76 1.5 1 1.315 3.00 3.00 3.9 DN25 33.7 76 1.1 76 1.2 76 1.8 11/4 1.660 4.00 3.0 4.00 3.3 4.00 4.8 DN32 42.4 102 1.4 102 1.5 102 2.2 11/2 1.900 4.00 3.5 4.00 3.9 4.00 6.9 DN40 48.3 102 1.6 102 1.8 102 3.1 2 2.375 4.00 5.5 4.00 6.0 4.00 8.2 2.50 5.3 DN50 60.3 102 2.5 102 2.7 102 3.7 64 2.4 21/2 2.875 4.00 8.0 4.00 9.9 4.00 11.9 73.0 102 3.6 102 4.5 102 5.4 3.000 2.50 6.5 DN65 76.1 _ _ _ _ _ _ 64 2.9 3 3.500 4.00 9.5 4.00 11.7 4.00 16.5 2.50 8.2 DN80 88.9 102 4.3 102 5.3 102 7.5 64 3.7 31/2 4.000 4.00 12.0 4.00 15.1 4.00 20.1 DN90 101.6 102 5.4 102 6.8 102 9.1 4 4.500 6.00 16.7 6.00 18.5 6.00 27.4 2.75 10.0 DN100 114.3 152 7.6 152 8.4 152 12.4 70 45 5 5.563 6.00 21.5 6.00 21.3 6.00 35.3 141.3 152 9.8 152 9.7 152 16.0 5.500 2.75 16.3 DN125 139.7 _ _ _ _ _ _ 70 7.4 6 6.625 6.00 26.5 6.00 27.5 6.00 47.5 2.75 16.3 DN150 168.3 152 12.0 152 12.5 152 21.5 70 7.4 6.500 165.1 8 8.625 6.00 39.0 6.00 41.3 6.00 70.3 DN200 219.1 152 17.7 152 18.8 152 31.9 10 10.750 8.00 57.0 8.00 59.3 8.00 100.8 DN250 273.0 203 25.9 203 27.1 203 45.7 12 12.750 8.00 41.0 8.00 40.0 8.00 146.2 DN300 323.9 203 18.6 203 40.0 203 66.3 142 14.000 8.00 8.00 8.00 DN350 355.6 203 _ 203 + 203 + 162 16.000 8.00 8.00 8.00 DN400 406.4 203 _ 203 + 203 + 182 18.000 8.00 8.00 8.00 DN450 457.0 203 _ 203 + 203 + 2 For 14"/DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 17 Aicctsullicr 4.11 DIMENSIONS (Continued) Flanged Adapter Nipple No. 41 ANSI Class 125 No. 45F ANSI Class 150 Flat Face No. 45R ANSI Class 150 Raised Face No. 46F ANSI Class 300 Flat Face No. 46R ANSI Class 300 Raised Face No. 45RE PN1O/PN16 Raised Face EtoE r EtoFA EtoE� r FtoE� EtoE� EtoE rn No. 41 No. 45F No. 45R No. 46F No. 46R No. 45RE No. 41 No. 45F and No. 45R No. 46F and No. 46R ANSI 125 ANSI 150 ANSI 300 No. 45RE Size Flange Adapter Nipple Flanged Adapter Nipple (s) Flanged Adapter Nipple (s) Flanged Adapter Nipple (s) Actual Approx' Approx. Approx. Approx. Outside Weight Weight Weight Weight Nominal Diameter E to E (Each) E to E (Each) E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches inches lb inches lb inches lb inches lb DIN mm mm kg mm kg mm kg mm kg 201 20.000 8.00 8.00 DN500 508.0 _ 203 203 + 203 + 242 24.000 8.00 8.00 8.00 DN600 610.0 203 _ 203 + 203 + _ 14-60 For AGS fitting information publication 20.05 AGv M DN350—DN1500 2 For 147DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded + Contact Victaulic for details NOTE • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 18 ✓ctsuliic' victaulic.com 4.12 DIMENSIONS Swaged Nipple No. 53 Grv. x Grv. No. 54 Grv. x Thd. No. 55 Thd. x Grv. I. EtoE-I I.- EtoE� r- EtoE� I- to -II.- EtoE-1 [- EtoE� F�o III [D� DI ID] [E> No. 53 No. 54 No. 55 No. 53 No. 54 No. 55 No. 53, 54, and 55 Swaged Size Nipples (s) Approx. Weight Nominal E to E (Each) inches inches lb DN mm kg 2 1 6.50 2.0 DN50 x DN25 165 0.9 6.50 2.0 11/4 DN32 165 0.9 6.50 2.0 11/2 DN40 165 0.9 21/2 1 7.00 3.0 x DN25 178 1.4 7.00 3.0 11/4 DN32 178 1.4 7.00 3.0 11/2 DN40 178 1.4 7.00 3.0 2 DN50 178 1.4 3 1 8.00 4.5 DN80 x DN25 203 2.0 8.00 4.5 11/4 DN32 203 2.0 8.00 4.5 11/2 DN40 203 2.0 8.00 4.5 2 DN50 203 2.0 8.00 4.5 21/2 203 2.0 31/2 3 8.00 6.8 DN90 x DN80 203 3.1 4 1 9.00 7.5 DN100 x DN25 229 3.4 9.00 7.5 11/4 DN32 229 3.4 9.00 7.5 11/2 DN40 229 3.4 9.00 7.5 2 DN50 229 3.4 9.00 7.5 21/2 229 3.4 9.00 7.5 3 DN80 229 3.4 9.00 7.5 31/2 DN90 229 3.4 No. 53, 54, and 55 Swaged Size Nipples (s) Approx. Weight Nominal E to E (Each) inches inches lb DN mm kg 5 2 11.00 11.5 x DN50 279 5.2 11.00 11.3 3 DN80 279 5.1 11.00 11.5 4 DN100 279 5.2 12.00 17.0 6 1 DN150 x DN25 305 7.7 12.00 17.0 1'/4 DN32 305 7.7 12.00 17.2 11/2 DN40 305 7.8 12.00 17.4 2 DN50 305 7.9 12.00 17.4 21/2 305 7.9 12.00 17.4 3 DN80 305 7.9 12.00 17.4 31/2 DN90 305 7.9 12.00 17.5 4 DN100 305 7.9 12.00 17.5 41/2 305 7.9 12.00 17.5 5 305 7.9 8 6 DN200 x DN150 + 20.0 9.1 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded + Contact Victaulic for details NOTE • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 19 ✓ctsuliicr victaulic.com 4.13 DIMENSIONS Female Threaded Adapter No. 80 Etc E -'ff No. 80 Size No. 80 Female Threaded Adapter Actual Approx. Outside Weight Nominal Diameter E to E (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 3/4 1.050 2.00 1.0 DN20 26.9 51 0.5 1 1.315 2.06 1.0 DN25 33.7 52 0.5 1'/4 1.660 2.31 (sw) 1.5 DN32 42.4 59 0.7 11/2 1.900 2.31 (sw) 1.5 DN40 48.3 59 0.7 2 2.375 2.50 1.4 DN50 60.3 64 0.6 21/2 2.875 2.75 1.5 73.0 70 0.7 3 3.500 2.75 2.9 DN80 88.9 70 1.3 4 4.500 3.25 4.5 DN100 114.3 83 2.0 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTES • Available with British Standard Pipe Threads, specify "BSP" clearly on order. • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 4.14 DIMENSIONS Hose Nipple No. 48 EtoE � No. 48 Size No. 48 Hose Nipple (s) Approx. Actual Outside Weight Nominal Diameter E to E (Each) inches inches inches lb DN mm mm kg 3/4 1.050 3.12 0.3 DN20 26.9 79 0.1 1 1.315 3.38 0.4 DN25 33.7 86 0.2 11/4 1.660 3.88 0.6 DN32 42.4 98 0.3 1'/2 1.900 3.88 0.8 DN40 48.3 98 0.4 2 2.375 4.50 1.1 DN50 60.3 114 0.5 21/2 2.875 5.38 2.0 73.0 137 0.9 3 3.500 5.75 3.2 DN80 88.9 146 1.5 4 4.500 7.00 4.9 DN100 114.3 178 2.2 5 5.563 8.75 8.0 141.3 222 3.6 6 6.625 10.13 14.3 DN150 168.3 257 6.5 8 8.625 11.88 24.7 DN200 219.1 302 11.2 10 10.750 12.50 40.1 DN250 273.0 318 18.2 12 12.750 14.50 62.0 DN300 323.9 368 28.1 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTE • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtmidir rnm 20 �CtaUllicr 4.15 DIMENSIONS Concentric/Eccentric Reducer No. 50 Concentric No. 51 Eccentric Into E� �EtoE� �EtoE� [-c-EtoE� No. 50 No. 51 Fabricated Steel Fabricated Steel No. 50 No. 51 No. 50 Concentric No. 51 Size Reducer Approx. Eccentric Reducer Approx. Weight Weight Nominal E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches lb inches lb DN mm kg mm kg 11/4 3/4 1.9 DN32 x DN20 + 0.9 1 1.9 DN25 + 0.9 11/2 3/a 1.4 DN40 x DN20 + 0.6 1 2.50 0.8 8.50 (sw) 4.5 DN25 64 0.4 216 2.0 11/4 2.50 1.0 DN32 64 0.5 2 3/4 2.50 0.9 9.00 (sw) 2.0 DN50 x DN20 64 0.3 229 0.9 1 2.50 0.7 9.00 (sw) 2.3 DN25 64 0.3 229 1.0 11/4 2.50 1.2 9.00 (sw) 4.6 DN32 64 0.5 229 2.1 11/2 2.50 1.0 3.50 1.1 DN40 64 0.5 89 0.5 21/2 3/a 1.3 3.3 x DN20 + 0.6 + 1.5 1 2.50 1.1 9.50 3.5 DN25 64 0.5 241 1.6 11/4 3.50 3.3 3.50 1.4 DN32 89 1.5 89 0.6 11/2 2.50 3.6 9.50 (sw) 3.7 DN40 64 1.6 241 1.7 2 2.50 3.9 3.50 4.3 DN50 64 1.8 89 2.0 3 3/4 1.5 4.5 DN80 x DN20 + 0.7 + 2.0 1 2.50 1.3 9.50 (sw) 4.8 DN25 64 0.6 241 2.2 11/4 2.50 1.4 4.8 DN32 64 0.6 + 2.2 11/2 2.50 5.1 9.50 (sw) 5.1 DN40 64 2.3 241 2.3 2 2.50 1.6 3.50 6.0 DN50 64 0.7 89 2.7 21/2 2.50 1.8 3.50 7.0 64 0.8 89 3.2 DN65 2.50 2.1 64 1.0 31/i 3 2.50 2.0 9.50 (sw) 7.0 DN90 x DN80 64 0.9 241 3.2 4 1 3.00 3.0 13.00 (sw) 6.5 DN100 x DN25 76 1.4 330 2.9 n �EtoE� n� No. 50 No. 51 1-c-EtoE-*l [4--EtoE� Fabricated Steel Fabricated Steel No. 50 No. 51 No. 50 Concentric No. 51 Size Reducer Approx. Eccentric Reducer Approx. Weight Weight Nominal E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches lb inches lb DN mm kg mm kg 11/4 4.6 DN32 + 2.1 11/2 3.00 (sw) 2.6 10.00 (sw) 8.1 DN40 76 1.2 254 3.7 2 3.00 2.4 4.00 3.3 DN50 76 1.1 102 1.5 21/2 3.00 2.7 4.00 3.4 76 1.2 102 1.5 3 3.00 3.2 4.00 3.5 DN80 76 1.4 102 1.6 31/2 3.00 2.9 10.00 (sw) 8.0 DN90 76 1.3 254 3.6 5 2 11.00 (sw) 9.0 11.00 (sw) 5.2 x DN50 279 4.1 279 2.4 21/2 4.00 4.3 11.00 (sw) 10.8 102 2.0 279 4.9 3 4.00 5.5 11.00 (sw) 11.1 DN80 102 2.5 279 5.0 4 3.50 4.3 5.00 12.0 DN100 89 1.9 127 5.4 6 1 4.00 5.0 11.50 (sw) 14.5 DN150 x DN25 102 2.3 292 6.6 11/2 5.5 DN40 + 2.5 + + 2 4.00 6.6 11.50 (sw) 14.5 DN50 102 3.0 292 6.6 21/2 4.00 6.4 11.50 (sw) 14.2 102 2.9 292 6.4 3 4.00 6.4 5.50 15.0 DN80 102 2.9 140 6.8 4 4.00 6.5 5.50 17.0 DN100 102 2.9 140 7.7 5.50 17.0 5 4.00 6.4 102 2.9 140 7.7 8 21/2 16.00 7.9 12.00 (sw) 26.1 DN200 x 406 3.6 305 11.8 3 5.00 9.3 12.00 (sw) 22.0 DN80 127 4.2 305 10.0 4 5.00 10.4 12.00 (sw) 23.0 DN100 127 4.8 305 10.4 5 5.00 11.6 12.00 (sw) 23.0 127 5.2 305 10.4 6 5.00 11.9 6.00 24.0 DN150 127 5.4 152 10.9 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. 21 ,NArctsulicr 4.15 DIMENSIONS (Continued) Concentric/Eccentric Reducer No. 50 Concentric No. 51 Eccentric I'to E� ru-EtoE� I*--EtoE� ru-EtoE� No. 50 No. 51 Fabricated Steel Fabricated Steel No. 50 No. 51 No. 50 Concentric No. 51 Size Reducer Eccentric Reducer Approx. Approx. Weight Weight Nominal E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches lb inches lb DN mm kg mm kg 10 4 6.00 19.7 13.00 (sw) 32.0 DN250 X DN100 152 8.9 330 14.5 34.6 5 33.0 + 15.0 + 15.7 6 6.00 20.0 13.00 (sw) 36.9 DN150 152 9.1 330 16.7 8 6.00 22.0 7.00 21.6 DN200 152 10.0 178 9.8 12 4 44.0 14.00 (sw) 48.0 DN300 X DN100 + 20.0 356 21.8 6 7.00 24.6 14.00 (sw) 50.0 DN150 178 11.2 356 22.7 8 7.00 52.0 14.00 (sw) 53.5 DN200 178 23.6 356 24.3 7.00 39.0 14.00 (sw) 57.0 10 DN250 178 17.7 356 25.9 13.00 65.0 13.00 60.0 142 6 DN350 X DN150 330 29.5 330 27.2 8 13.00 65.0 13.00 60.0 DN200 330 29.5 330 27.2 10 13.00 66.0 13.00 65.0 DN250 330 29.9 330 29.5 12 13.00 68.0 13.00 66.0 DN300 330 30.8 330 29.9 162 8 14.00 73.0 14.00 73.0 DN400 X DN200 356 33.1 355 33.1 10 14.00 73.0 14.00 73.0 DN250 356 33.1 355 33.1 12 14.00 73.0 14.00 73.0 DN300 356 33.1 355 33.1 14 14.00 73.0 14.00 73.0 DN350 356 33.1 355 33.1 182 10 15.00 91.0 15.00 91.0 DN450 x DN250 381 41.3 381 41.3 12 15.00 91.0 15.00 91.0 DN300 381 41.3 381 41.3 14 15.00 91.0 15.00 91.0 DN350 381 41.3 381 41.3 16 15.00 91.0 15.00 91.0 DN400 381 41.3 381 41.3 2 For 147DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. I'to E� ru- EtoE I No. 50 No. 51 I*--EtoE-, rc-EtoEEli Fabricated Steel Fabricated Steel No. 50 No. 51 No. 50 Concentric No. 51 Size Reducer Eccentric Reducer Approx. Approx. Weight Weight Nominal E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches lb inches lb DN mm kg mm kg 202 10 20.00 110.0 20.00 177.0 DN500 x DN250 508 49.9 508 80.3 12 20.00 120.0 20.00 120.0 DN300 508 54.4 508 54.4 14 20.00 149.0 20.00 149.0 DN350 508 67.9 508 67.9 16 20.00 120.0 20.00 120.0 DN400 508 54.4 508 54.4 18 20.00 136.0 20.00 136.0 DN450 508 61.7 508 61.7 242 10 20.00 142.0 20.00 142.0 DN600 x DN250 508 64.4 508 64.4 12 20.00 150.0 20.00 150.0 DN300 508 68.0 508 68.0 14 20.00 162.0 20.00 162.0 DN350 508 73.5 508 73.5 16 20.00 162.0 20.00 162.0 DN400 508 73.5 508 73.5 18 20.00 162.0 20.00 162.0 DN450 508 73.5 508 73.5 20 20.00 151.0 20.00 190.0 DN500 508 68.5 508 86.2 For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 14-60 DN350 - DN1500 AGS" V 2 For 147DN350 and larger roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales representative. (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded + Contact Victaulic for details. NOTES • Available with male threaded small end No. 52. • Cast fitting available for JIS size. Contact Victaulic for details. • Steel eccentric reducers available through 30'7DN750, contact Victaulic for dimensions. • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. 22 ,NArctsulicr victaulic.com 4.16 DIMENSIONS Small Threaded Reducer No. 52 No. 52F E E E E 5 E 5 fl No. 52 No 52F No. 52 No 52F No. 52F Concentric No. 52 Reducer with BSPT Size Small Threader Reducer Female Threaded End Approx. Approx. Weight Weight Nominal E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches lb DN mm kg mm kg 11/2 1 2.50 0.8 DN40 x DN25 64 0.4 11/4 2.50 0.9 DN32 64 0.4 2 3/4 2.50 0.9 DN50 x DN20 64 0.4 1 2.50 0.7 DN25 64 0.3 1 1/4 2.50 1.2 DN32 64 0.5 11/2 2.50 1.0 DN40 64 0.5 21/2 1 2.50 1.1 x DN25 64 0.5 11/4 2.50 (sw) 1.2 DN32 64 0.5 11/2 2.50 (sw) 1.3 DN40 64 0.6 2 2.50 1.4 DN50 64 0.6 x 64 0.8 64 0.8 DN65 DN40 2 - - 64 0.9 DN50 x +(sw) 1.5 - - DN80 DN20 0.7 1 2.50 1.3 DN25 64 0.6 1'/4 2.50 1.5 DN32 64 0.7 1 1/2 2.50 (sw) 1.5 DN40 64 0.7 2 2.50 1.5 DN50 64 0.7 21/2 2.50 2.4 64 1.1 _ 88.9mm x 42.4mm 64 0.9 64 0.8 48.3mm 64 0.9 64 0.9 60mm - - 64 0.9 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded + Contact Victaulic for details. No. 52F Concentric No. 52 Reducer with BSPT Size Small Threader Reducer Female Threaded End Approx. Approx. Weight Weight Nominal E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches lb DN mm kg mm kg 4 1 3.00 2.3 DN100 x DN25 76 1.0 11/2 3.00 2.7 DN40 76 1.2 2 3.00 2.6 DN50 76 1.2 21/2 3.00 2.6 76 1.2 3 3.00 2.5 DN80 76 1.1 - - 108.0mm x 42.4mm 76 1.3 76 1.3 48.3mm 76 1.3 76 1.4 60mm - - 76 1.4 114.3mm x 42.4mm 76 1.3 76 1.3 48.3mm 76 1.3 76 1.3 60mm 76 1.3 76 1.4 5 4 4.5 x DN100 + 2.0 133.Omm x 60mm - - 114 2.2 139.Omm x 60mm - - 114 2.3 6 1 4.00 5.5 DN150 x DN25 102 2.5 2 4.00 5.7 DN50 102 2.6 21/2 4.00 5.8 102 2.6 3 4.00 5.8 DN80 102 2.6 +(sw) 6.2.9 - - DN100 5 +(sw) 2.0 - - 0.9 159.Omm x 42.4mm 114 2.2 144 2.5 48.3mm 114 2.2 114 2.5 60mm - - 114 2.6 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 23 Aicctsullicr victaulic.com 4.16 DIMENSIONS (Continued) Small Threaded Reducer No. 52 No. 52F E �-toE� E No. 52 No 52F No. 52 No. 52F Concentric Small Threader Reducer with BSPT Size Reducer Female Threaded End Approx. Approx. Weight Weight Nominal E to E (Each) E to E (Each) inches inches lb DN mm kg mm kg 165.1 mm x 42.4mm 102mm 4 102 2.9 102mm .6 102 3.0 48.3mm — — 102 3.0 60mm 8 2 DN200 x DN50 16.00 406 1.5 0.7 16.00 1.7 21/2 406 0.8 (s) = Carbon Steel Direct Roll Groove (OGS) (sw) = Carbon Steel Segmentally Welded NOTES • Available with British Standard Pipe Threads, specify "BSP" clearly on order. • All fittings are ductile iron unless otherwise noted with an (sw) or (s). 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 24 Aicctsullicr victaulic.com 5.0 PERFORMANCE Flow Data (Frictional Resistance) The chart expresses the frictional resistance of various Victaulic fittings as equivalent feet of straight pipe. Fittings not listed can be estimated from the data given, for example, a 221/2' elbow is approximately one-half the resistance of a 450 elbow. Values of mid -sizes can be interpolated. Size Dimensions 90° Elbows 45° Elbows Tees Actual No. 100 No. 110 Outside No. 10 11/z D Long No. 11 11/2 D Long Nominal Diameter Sid. Radius Radius Std. Radius Radius Branch Run inches inches feet feet feet feet feet feet DIN mm meters meters meters meters meters meters 1 1.315 1.7 0.8 4.2 1.7 DN25 33.7 0.5 _ 0.2 _ 1.3 0.5 2 2.375 3.5 2.5 1.8 1.1 8.5 3.5 DN50 60.3 1.1 0.8 0.5 0.3 2.6 1.1 3.000 4.3 2.1 10.8 4.3 DN65 76.1 1.3 _ 0.7 _ 3.3 1.3 3 3.500 5.0 3.8 2.6 1.6 13.0 5.0 DN80 88.9 1.5 1.2 0.8 0.5 4.0 1.5 4.250 6.4 3.2 15.3 6.4 108.0 2.0 _ 0.9 _ 4.7 2.0 4 4.500 6.8 5.0 3.4 2.1 16.0 6.8 DN100 114.3 2.1 1.5 1.0 0.6 4.9 2.1 5.250 8.1 4.1 20.0 8.1 133.0 2.5 _ 1.2 _ 6.2 2.5 5.500 8.5 4.2 21.0 8.5 DN125 139.7 2.6 _ 1.3 _ 6.4 2.6 5 5.563 8.5 4.2 21.0 8.5 141.3 2.6 _ 1.3 _ 6.4 2.6 6.250 9.4 4.9 25.0 9.6 159.0 2.9 _ 1.5 _ 7.6 2.9 6.500 9.6 5.0 25.0 10.0 165.1 2.9 _ 1.5 _ 7.6 3.0 6 6.625 10.0 7.5 5.0 3.0 25.0 10.0 DN150 168.3 3.0 2.3 1.5 0.9 7.6 3.0 8 8.625 13.0 9.8 6.5 4.0 33.0 13.0 DN200 219.1 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.2 10.1 4.0 10 10.750 17.0 12.0 8.3 5.0 41.0 17.0 DN250 273.0 5.2 3.7 2.5 1.5 12.5 5.2 12 12.750 20.0 14.5 10.0 6.0 50.0 20.0 DN300 323.9 6.1 4.4 3.0 1.8 15.2 6.1 14 14.000 24.54 15.8 18.54 11.0 70.0 23.0 DN350 355.6 7.5 4.8 5.6 3.4 21.3 7.0 16 16.000 28.04 18.0 21.04 13.0 80.0 27.0 DN400 406.4 8.5 5.5 6.4 4.0 24.4 8.2 18 18.000 31.04 20.0 23.54 14.0 90.0 30.0 DN450 457.0 9.5 6.1 7.2 4.3 27.4 9.1 20 20.000 34.04 22.5 25.54 16.0 100.0 33.0 DN800 508.0 10.4 6.9 7.8 4.9 30.5 10.1 24 24.000 42.04 27.0 29.54 19.0 120.0 40.0 DN600 610.0 12.8 8.2 9.0 5.8 36.6 12.2 AGS fittings available up to 60'7DN1500. Contact Victaulic for details. AGS'" v- 4 Fitting flow data for 14-24"/DN350-DN600 size No. 10 and No. 11 Elbows is based on fittings for Style 07 and 77 couplings. For flow data on AGS fittings (No. W10 and No. W11 Elbows), refer to publication 20.05. 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 25 Aicctsullicr victaulic.com User Responsibility for Product Selection and Suitability Each user bears final responsibility for making a determination as to the suitability of Victaulic products for a particular end -use application, in accordance with industry standards and project specifications, and the applicable building codes and related regulations as well as Victaulic performance, maintenance, safety, and warning instructions. Nothing in this or any other document, nor any verbal recommendation, advice, or opinion from any Victaulic employee, shall be deemed to alter, vary, supersede, or waive any provision of Victaulic Company's standard conditions of sale, installation guide, or this disclaimer. Intellectual Property Rights No statement contained herein concerning a possible or suggested use of any material, product, service, or design is intended, or should be constructed, to grant any license under any patent or other intellectual property right of Victaulic or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates covering such use or design, or as a recommendation for the use of such material, product, service, or design in the infringement of any patent or other intellectual property right. The terms "Patented" or "Patent Pending" refer to design or utility patents or patent applications for articles and/or methods of use in the United States and/or other countries. Note This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. Installation Reference should always be made to the Victaulic installation handbook or installation instructions of the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment of Victaulic products, providing complete installation and assembly data, and are available in PDF format on our website at www.victaulic.com. Warranty Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. Trademarks Victaulic and all other Victaulic marks are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Victaulic Company, and/or its affiliated entities, in the U.S. and/or other countries. 07.01 1449 Rev AF Updated 08/2017 © 2017 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 26 Actsulicr ES-A-3000SS Job Name Contractor Job Location Approval Engineer Contractor's P.O. No. Approval Series 3000SS Double Check Detector Assemblies Sizes: 2'/2" -12" Series 3000SS Double Check Detector Assemblies are designed for use in accordance with water utility non -health hazard contain- ment requirements. It is mandatory to prevent the reverse flow of fire protection system substances, such as glycerin wetting agents, stagnant water, and water of non -potable quality from being pumped or siphoned into the potable water supply. Features • Cam -Check Assembly valve provides low head loss • Short lay length is ideally suited for retrofit installations • Stainless steel body is half the weight of competitive designs reducing installation and shipping cost • Stainless steel construction provides long term corrosion protection and maximum strength • Single top access cover with two -bolt grooved style coupling for ease of maintenance • No special tools required for servicing • Compact construction allows for smaller vaults and enclosures • Furnished with %" x 3/a" bronze meter (gpm or cfm) • Detects underground leaks and unauthorized water use • May be installed horizontal or vertical "flow up" position (ASSE Only) • Includes an integrated supervisory tamper switch on each gate valve of the OSY model Specification A Double Check Detector Assembly shall be installed on fire protection systems when connected to a drinking water supply. Degree of hazard present is determined by the local authority having jurisdiction. The main valve body shall be manufactured from 300 Series stainless steel to provide corrosion resistance, 100% lead free* through the waterway. The double check detec- tor assembly consists of two independently operating, spring loaded check valves, two UL, FM, OSY resilient seated gate valves, and bypass assembly. The bypass assembly consists of a meter (cubic ft. or gallons), a double check including shutoff valves and required test cocks. Each cam -check shall be inter- nally loaded and provide a positive drip tight closure against reverse flow. Cam -check includes a stainless steel cam arm and spring, rubber faced disc and a replaceable seat. There shall be no brass or bronze parts used within the cam -check valve assembly. The check valve seats shall be of molded thermoplastic con- struction. The use of seat screws as a retention method is prohibited. All internal parts shall be accessible through a single cover on the valve assembly. The valve cover shall be held in Representative place through the use of a single grooved style two -bolt cou- pling. The bypass line shall be hydraulically sized to accurately measure low flow. The bypass line shall consist of a meter, a small diameter double check assembly with test cocks and iso- lation valves. The bypass line double check valve shall have two independently operating modular poppet check valves, and top mounted test cocks. The integrated supervisory tamper switch on the OSY model shall have continuity with the valve fully open and activate within two (2) turns from open. The device consists of two SPDT switches and is designed to send a tamper signal when the valve is closed and when the switch is removed from the valve. In the neutral position, the switch indicates the valve is fully open. Closing the valve causes the switch rod to come out of the valve stem groove, activating the switch. Removing the tam- per switch also activates the switch. The assembly shall be an Ames Fire & Waterworks 3000SS. The information contained herein is not intended to replace the full product installation and safety information available or the experience of a trained product installer. You are required to thor- oughly read all installation instructions and product safety infor- mation before beginning the installation of this product. It is illegal to use this product in any plumbing system providing water for human consumption, such as drinking or dishwashing, in the United States. Before installing standard material product, consult your local water authority, building and plumbing codes. *The wetted surface of this product contacted by consumable water contains less than 0.25% of lead by weight. Ames Fire & Waterworks product specifications in U.S. customary units and metric are approximate and are provided for reference only. For precise measure- ments, please contact Ames Fire & Waterworks Technical Service. Ames Fire & Waterworks reserves the right to change or modify product design, construction, specifications, or materials without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make such changes and modifications on Ames Fire & Waterworks products previously or subsequently sold. A WATTS Brand Materials All internal metal parts: 300 Series stainless steel, Main valve body: 300 Series stainless steel, Check assembly: Noryl° Flange dimension in accordance with AWWA Class D. Available Models Suffix: LG — Less shutoff valves OSY-TS — UVFM outside stem and yoke resilient seated gate valves with integrated tamper switch OSY FxG** — Flanged inlet gate connection and grooved outlet gate connection OSY FxF" — Flanged inlet gate connection and flanged out- let gate connection OSY GxF°° — Grooved inlet gate connection and flanged outlet gate connection OSY GxG"" — Grooved inlet gate connection and grooved outlet gate connection CFM — Cubic feet per minute GPM — Gallons per minute meter Consult factory for the following: — Grooved NRS gate valves — Post -indicator plate and operating nut — Dimensions Dimensions - Weights �L� A Pressure — Temperature Temperature Range: 33°F — 110°F (0.5°C — 43°C) Maximum Working Pressure: 175psi (12 bar) Standards ASSE 1048, AWWA C510-92, CSA B64.5, UL 1469 Approvals UL Classified (OSY only), FM (sizes 21/2" — 10", OSY only) USC Foundation for Cross -Connection Control and Hydraulic Research OFM v"pSslf,Fo H55E O1 Approved ` For 12" assembly approvals consult factory. C 'Open) o 0 I 0 0 0 O o L 0 0 0 P SIZE DIMENSIONS NET WEIGHT NET WEIGHT in. in. A mm C (OSY) in. mm in. D mm in. G mm in. L mm in. P mm w/Gates Ib kg w/o Gates lb kg 21/2 37 965 16% 416 31/2 89 10 250 22 559 121/2 318 160 72 68 31 3 38 965 18'/8 479 33/4 95 10 250 22 559 13 330 235 106 70 32 4 40 1016 223/4 578 41/2 114 10 250 22 559 141/2 368 245 111 73 33 6 481/2 1232 30% 765 51/2 140 15 381 271/2 699 151/2 394 395 179 120 54 8 521/2 1334 373/4 959 63/4 171 15 381 291/2 749 181/2 464 577 261 180 82 10 1 551/2 1410 1 453/4 1162 1 8 200 1 15 381 1 291/2 749 1 191/2 495 1 779 353 1 190 86 12 1 571/2 1461 1 53% 1349 1 91/2 241 1 15 381 1 291h 749 1 21 533 1 1049 476 1 220 100 Noryl® is a registered trademark of SHPP Global Technologies B.V. Capacity Flow curves as tested by Underwriters Laboratory per UL 1469, 1996. * Rated flow **UL Tested ������■■��■■fit ! .■■■..■■■■ MERE■ .MEMEMEEEEEMEME� • MEMEMEEEEEMERE, A WATTS Brand ES-A-3000SS 2205 \. `MEEEEEEEE r E�. "4�EEEEEEE EE� '4�E EE�ON 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 0 1200 1300 1400 1500 gpm 380 760 1140 1520 1900 2280 2660 3040 34 4560 4940 5320 5700 Ipm 5 15 fps 1.5 3 4.6 mps kPa psi 8° * PAM=MOMEI 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 NqRllllllllll 950 1900 2850 3800 4750 5700 6650 7600 8550 9500 pm 5 10 15 fps 1.5 3 4.6 mps 10" kPa psi * ** 103 15 83 12 62 9 41 6 21 3 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3500 gpm 950 1900 2850 3800 4750 5700 6650 7600 8550 9500 11400 13300 Ipm 5 10 fps 1.5 3 mps 12" kPa psi * ** 110 16 97 14 83 12 69 10 55 8 0-00 41 6 28 4 14 2 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 gpm 1900 3800 5700 7600 9500 11400 13300 15200 17100 Ipm 5 10 fps 1.5 3 mps USA: Backflow T: (978) 689-6066 • F: (978) 975-8350 • AmesFireWater.com USA: Control Valves T: (713) 943-0688 • F: (713) 944-9445 • AmesFireWater.com Canada: T: (888) 208-208-8927 • F: (905) 481-2316 • AmesFireWater.ca Latin America: T: (52) 55-4122-0138 • AmesFireWater.com 0 2022 Watts Firel-ock° Butterfly Valve ✓ctaullc` Series 705 with Weatherproof Actuator 10.81 ` I 1.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION • Available Sizes: 2 — 12"/50 — 300 mm • cULus Listed, LPCB Listed, FM and VdS Approved for service up to 300 psi/2068 kPa 120 bar. • Designed for fire protection services only. • Features a weatherproof actuator housing Approved for indoor and outdoor use. • Actuation options: Hand wheel (2 — 12"/50 — 300 mm) • Exclusively for use with pipe and Victaulic products which feature ends formed with the Victaulic Original Groove System (OGS) groove profile (see section 7.0 for Reference Materials). 2.0 CERTIFICATION/LISTINGS C (SIN o 0 [ !° STii � , Or W G410001 LPs1185 --31 CeWLPCB Ref_ 1041,01 846a/01 ALWAYS REFER TO ANY NOTIFICATIONS AT THE END OF THIS DOCUMENT REGARDING PRODUCT INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR SUPPORT. System No. Location Submitted By Date Spec Section Paragraph Approved Date victaulic.com 10.81 05662 Rev J Updated 03/2021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. 1 �ctaUIii& virtaidir rnm 2.1 CERTIFICATION/LISTINGS Approval/Listing Service Pressures Series 705 Butterfly Valve Size cULus FM Vds LPCB 2 50 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa 21/2 65 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa n/a up to 300psi/2068kPa 76.1 mm up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa 3 80 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa 4 100 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa 5 125 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa n/a up to 300psi/2068kPa 139.7 mm up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa 6 150 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa 165.1 mm up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa n/a up to 300psi/2068kPa 8 200 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa 10 250 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa n/a up to 300psi/2068kPa 12 300 up to 300psi/2068kPa up to 300psi/2068kPa n/a up to 300psi/2068kPa 3.0 SPECIFICATIONS — MATERIAL Body: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 End Face, 2 — 6'750 — 150 mm: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 Seal Retainer, 8 — 12'7200 — 300 mm: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 Body Coating: Black alkyd enamel Disc: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with electroless nickel coating conforming to ASTM B-733 Seat: Grade "E" EPDM Stems: 416 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A-582 Stem Seal Cartridge: C36000 brass Bearings: Stainless steel with TFE lining Stem Seals: EPDM Stem Retaining Ring: Carbon steel Actuator: ❑ 2 — 8750 — 200 mm: Brass or bronze traveling nut on a steel lead screw, in a ductile iron housing ❑ 10 — 127250 — 300 mm: Steel worm and cast iron quadrant gear, in a cast iron housing 10.81 05662 Rev J Updated 03/2021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. virtaidir_rnm 2 ✓ctaulic® victaulic.com 4.0 DIMENSIONS Series 705 Size Dimensions Actual Outside E to E DIA Nominal Diameter A B C D E F G H J inches inches inches inches inches inches inches inches inches inches inches mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 2 2.375 4.25 2.28 6.41 4.00 4.22 4.50 2.12 60.3 60.3 108.0 57.9 162.8 _ _ 101.6 107.2 114.3 53.8 21/2 2.875 3.77 2.28 7.54 4.00 4.22 4.50 1.77 73 73.0 95.8 57.9 191.5 _ _ 101.6 107.2 114.3 45.0 76.1 mm 3.000 3.77 2.28 7.54 _ _ 4.00 4.22 4.50 1.77 76.1 95.8 57.9 191.5 101.6 107.2 114.3 45.0 3 3.500 3.77 2.53 7.79 4.50 4.22 4.50 1.77 88.9 88.9 95.8 64.3 197.9 _ _ 114.3 107.2 114.3 45.0 108 mm 4.250 4.63 2.88 8.81 _ _ 5.50 4.22 4.50 2.20 108.0 117.6 73.2 223.8 139.7 107.2 114.3 55.9 4 4.500 4.63 2.88 8.81 5.50 4.22 4.50 2.20 114.3 114.3 117.6 73.2 223.8 _ _ 139.7 107.2 114.3 55.9 133 mm 5.250 5.88 3.35 10.88 _ _ 6.56 6.19 6.30 2.58 133.0 149.4 85.1 276.4 166.6 157.2 160.0 65.5 139.7 mm 5.500 5.88 3.35 10.88 _ _ 6.56 6.19 6.30 2.58 139.7 149.4 85.1 276.4 166.6 157.2 160.0 65.6 5 5.563 5.88 3.35 10.88 6.56 6.19 6.30 2.58 141.3 141.3 149.4 85.1 276.4 _ _ 166.6 157.2 160.0 65.5 159 mm 6.250 5.88 3.84 11.38 _ 0.41 7.52 6.19 6.30 2.58 159.0 149.4 97.5 289.1 10.4 191.0 157.2 160.0 65.5 165.1 mm 6.500 5.88 3.84 11.38 _ 0.41 7.52 6.19 6.30 2.58 165.1 149.4 97.5 289.1 10.4 191.0 157.2 160.0 65.5 6 6.625 5.88 3.84 11.38 0.41 7.52 6.19 6.30 1.90 168.3 168.3 149.4 97.5 289.1 _ 10.4 191.0 157.2 160.0 48.3 8 8.625 5.33 5.07 13.53 0.80 1.47 10.00 6.19 8.10 2.33 219.1 219.1 135.4 128.8 343.6 20.3 37.3 254.0 157.2 205.7 59.2 10 10.750 6.40 6.37 15.64 1.41 1.81 12.25 8.10 9.00 273 273.0 162.6 161.8 397.3 35.8 46.0 311.2 205.7 228.6 _ 12 12.750 6.50 7.36 16.64 2.30 2.80 14.25 8.10 9.00 323.9 323.9 165.1 186.9 422.7 58.4 71.1 362.0 205.7 228.6 _ NOTE • Optional V2715 mm tap available. Contact Victaulic ford eta I Is. 10.81 05662 Rev J Updated 03/2021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com ✓ctaulic® victaulic.com 5.0 PERFORMANCE Series 705 The chart expresses the frictional resistance of Victaulic Series 705 Butterfly Valve in equivalent feet/meters of straight pipe. Nominal Outside Equivalent Size Diameter mm mm Feet/m inches inches of pipe 2 2.375 6 50 60.3 1.8 21/2 2.875 6 65 73.0 1.8 76.1 mm 3.000 6 76.1 1.8 3 3.500 7 80 88.9 2.1 4 4.500 8 100 114.3 2.4 108 mm 108 mm 8 2.4 5 5.563 12 125 141.3 3.7 133 mm 133 mm 12 3.7 139.7 mm 5.500 12 139.7 3.7 6 6.625 14 150 168.3 4.2 159 mm 159 mm 14 4.3 165.1 mm 6.500 14 165.1 4.2 8 8.625 16 200 219.1 4.9 10 10.750 18 250 273.0 5.5 12 12.750 19 300 323.9 5.8 10.81 05662 Rev J Updated 03/2021 0 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com il ✓ctaulic® victaulic.com 5.1 PERFORMANCE Series 705 Cv values for flow of water at +60°F/+16°C through a fully open valve are shown in the table below. For additional details, contact Victaulic. Formulas for C, values Formulas for K, values AP = Q2 Where: AP = Qz C 22 Q = Flow (GPM) K zZ AP = Pressure Drop (psi) Q = Cv x AP C = Flow Coefficient Q — K x AP Valve Size Full Open Actual Nominal Outside Size Diameter Flow Coefficient inches inches Cv mm mm 2 2.375 170 50 60.3 260 21/2 2.875 65 73.0 76.1 mm 3.000 260 76.1 3 3.500 440 80 88.9 4 4.500 820 100 114.3 108mm 108mm 820 5 5.563 1200 125 141.3 133 mm 133 mm 1200 139.7mm 5.500 1200 139.7 6 6.625 1800 150 168.3 159 mm 159 mm 1800 165.1 mm 6.500 1800 165.1 8 8.625 3400 200 219.1 10 10.750 5800 250 273.0 12 12.750 300 323.9 Where: Q = Flow W/hr) AP = Pressure Drop (Bar) KV = Flow Coefficient Valve Size Full Open Actual Nominal Outside Size Diameter Flow Coefficient inches inches K mm mm 2 2.375 147 50 60.3 21/2 2.875 225 65 73.0 76.1 mm 3.000 225 76.1 3 3.500 380 80 88.9 4 4.500 710 100 114.3 108mm 108mm 710 5 5.563 1040 125 141.3 133 mm 133 mm 1040 139.7mm 5.500 1040 139.7 6 6.625 1560 150 168.3 159 mm 159 mm 1560 165.1 mm 6.500 1560 165.1 8 8.625 2940 200 219.1 10 10.750 5020 250 273.0 12 12.750 300 323.9 10.81 05662 Rev J Updated 03/2021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com 5 ✓ctaulic® vir+nr Jir rnm 6.0 NOTIFICATIONS A WARNING • Read and understand all instructions before attempting to install, remove, adjust, or maintain any Victaulic piping products. • Depressurize and drain the piping system before attempting to install, remove, adjust, or maintain any Victaulic piping products. • Wear safety glasses, hardhat, and foot protection. Failure to follow these instructions could result in death or serious personal injury and property damage. 7.0 REFERENCE MATERIALS Switch and Wiring 1. The supervisory switch contains two single pole, double throw, pre -wired switches. 2. Switches are rated: 10 amps @ 125 or 250 VAC/60 Hz 0.50 amps @ 125 VDC 0.25 amps @ 250 VDC 3. Switches supervise the valve in the "OPEN" position. 5. One switch has two #18 insulated wires per terminal, which permit complete supervision of leads (refer to diagrams and notes below). The second switch has one #18 insulated wire per terminal. This double circuit provides flexibility to operate two electrical devices at separate locations, such as an indicating light and an audible alarm, in the area that the valve is installed. 6. A #14 insulated ground lead (green) is provided. Switch #1 = S1 For connection to the supervisory circuit of a UL Listed alarm control panel Switch #2 = S2 Auxiliary switch that may be connected to auxiliary devices, per the authority having jurisdiction Sl Normally Closed: (2) Blue Common: (2) Yellow S2 fNormally Closed: Blue with Orange Stripe Normally Open: Brown with Orange Stripe Common: Yellow with Orange Stripe UL LISTED JUNCTIONN BOX CONDOR\ i i ''/z" NPT CONDOR CONNECTORS WIRE NUTS FIRE ALARM TO END -OF -LINE RESISTOR, CONTROL PANEL OR NEXT INDICATOR SUPERVISORY CIRCUIT SWITCH CONTACT RATING:IDA JR AT 125 AND 250VAC, O.SA AT 125 VDC,0.25 AT 250 VDCBELL OR VOLTAGE SOURCE HORN Switch 1: 2 leads per termina Switch 2:1 lead per terminal NOTES • The above diagram shows a connection between the common terminal (yellow — S1 and yellow -with -orange stripe — S2) and the normally closed terminal (blue — S1 and blue -with -orange stripe — S2). In this example, the indicator light and alarm will stay on until the valve is fully open. When the valve is fully open, the indicator light and alarm will go out. Cap off any unused wires (e.g. brown with orange stripe). • Only S1 (two leads per terminal) may be connected to the fire alarm control panel. • The connection of the alarm switch wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and the auxiliary switch per NFPA 70 (NEC). 10.81 05662 Rev J Updated 03/2021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. vir+mrdir rnm 0 ✓ctauli; victaulic.com 7.1 REFERENCE MATERIALS 10.01: Regulatory Approval Reference Guide 29.01: Terms and Conditions/Warranty 1-100: Field Installation Handbook User Responsibility for Product Selection and Suitability Each user bears final responsibility for making a determination as to the suitability of Victaulic products for a particular end -use application, in accordance with industry standards and project specifications, and the applicable building codes and related regulations as well as Victaulic performance, maintenance, safety, and warning instructions. Nothing in this or any other document, nor any verbal recommendation, advice, or opinion from any Victaulic employee, shall be deemed to alter, vary, supersede, or waive any provision of Victaulic Company's standard conditions of sale, installation guide, or this disclaimer. Intellectual Property Rights No statement contained herein concerning a possible or suggested use of any material, product, service, or design is intended, or should be constructed, to grant any license under any patent or other intellectual property right of Victaulic or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates covering such use or design, or as a recommendation for the use of such material, product, service, or design in the infringement of any patent or other intellectual property right. The terms "Patented" or "Patent Pending" refer to design or utility patents or patent applications for articles and/or methods of use in the United States and/or other countries. Note This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. Installation Reference should always be made to the Victaulic installation handbook or installation instructions of the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment of Victaulic products, providing complete installation and assembly data, and are available in PDF format on our website at www.victaulic.com. Warranty Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. Trademarks Victaulic and all other Victaulic marks are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Victaulic Company, and/or its affiliated entities, in the U.S. and/or other countries. 10.81 05662 Rev J Updated 03/2021 © 2021 Victaulic Company. All rights reserved. victaulic.com ✓ctaulic® Page 1 of 3 4" CHECK VALVE KJ MODEL M-2 The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page www.vikinggroupinc.com 1. DESCRIPTION The Viking 4" Model M-2 Check Valve is a general purpose rubber -faced check valve approved for use in fire service systems. The Model M-2 Check Valve is manufactured with a ductile iron body, a stainless steel clapper assembly, brass seat, and an EPDM rubber. Features 1. Ductile iron body for less weight and extra strength 2. Replaceable rubber seal 3. 1/2" NPT Drain Boss upstream of the seat 4. Lightweight, less than 12 lbs. 5. Spring loaded to prevent water hammer 2. LISTINGS AND APPROVALS cULus Listed - Guide HMER FM Approved - Single Check Valves NYC Department of Buildings - MEA 89-92-E Vol. 40 3. TECHNICAL DATA WARNING:www.PCancer aWarninnd s.ca.veHarm- www.P65Warnings.ca.gov Specifications: Rated to 250 psi (17.2 bar) water working pressure. Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (34.5 bar). Standard Grooved Connections - ANSI/AWWA C606 Friction Loss: 15' (Expressed in equivalent length of Schedule 40 pipe based on Hazen & Williams formula: C = 120.) Cv Factor: 414 Patent Pending Material Standards: Refer to Figure 1 Ordering Information: 4" Valve only Part Number 22550 4. INSTALLATION The Model M-2 Check Valve must be installed in an area not subject to freezing temperatures or physical damage. When corrosive atmospheres and/or contaminated water supplies are present, it is the owner's responsibility to verify compatibility with the Model M-2 Check Valve. Prior to installing the valve, thoroughly flush the water supply piping to verify that no foreign matter is present. NOTE: The Model M-2 Check Valve may be installed in the vertical position with direction of flow up, or in the horizontal position with the 1/2" drain boss down. Hydrostatic Test: The valve is factory tested at 500 psi (34.5 bar). Model M-2 Check Valves may be hydrostatically tested at 300 psi (20.7 bar) and/or 50 psi (3.4 bar) above the normal water working pressure for limited periods of time (two hours) for the purpose of acceptance by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. If air testing is required, do not exceed 80 psi (5.5 bar) air pressure. 5. OPERATION (Refer to Figure 1) Water flowing through the Viking Model M-2 Check Valve lifts the rubber-gasketed clapper assembly (2) off the seat (3) and flows into the sprinkler piping. When flow through the valve stops, the clapper assembly (2) closes quickly. Rubber gasket (9) forms a tight seal against water seat (3), trapping pressurized water above the clapper and prevents reverse flow from the sprinkler piping. 6. INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND MAINTENANCE A WARNING Any system maintenance or testing that involves placing a control valve or detection system out of service may eliminate the fire protection capabilities of that system. Prior to proceeding, notify all Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Consideration should be given to employment of a fire patrol in the affected area. Form No. F_032405 19.04.24 Rev 18.1 Replaces Form No. F_032405 Rev P65 (Revised images and format; replaced PN 12337 with 22550.) Page 2 of 3 4" CHECK VALVE Ki MODEL M-2 The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page www.vikinggroupinc.com The owner is responsible for maintaining the fire -protection system and devices in proper operating condition. The Model M-2 Check Valve and trim must be kept free of foreign matter, freezing conditions, corrosive atmospheres, contaminated water supplies, and any condition that could impair its operation or damage the device. It is imperative that the system be inspected and tested on a regular basis. The frequency of the inspections may vary due to contam- inated water supplies, corrosive water supplies, and corrosive atmospheres. For minimum maintenance and inspection requirements, refer to NFPA 25. In addition, the Authority Having Jurisdiction may have additional maintenance, testing, and inspection requirements that must be followed. 6-A Five -Year Internal Inspection (Refer to Figure 1) Internal inspection of check valves is recommended every five years unless inspections and tests indicate more frequent inspec- tions are required. 1. Notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction, the system is being taken out of service. 2. Ensure the fire alarm system has been placed in a safe condition and the central station has been notified of the work to prevent a false alarm. 3. Close the water supply main control valve, placing the system out of service. 4. Open the main drain. If necessary, open the system test valve to vent and completely drain the system. 5. Remove check valve from system. 6. Inspect water seat (3). Wipe away all contaminants, dirt, and mineral deposits. Do not use solvents or abrasives. 7. Inspect clapper assembly (2) and rubber (9). Replace damaged or worn rubber parts as required. NOTE: THE CLAPPERASSEMBLY IS NOT REPLACEABLE. IF IT IS DETERMINED THATTHE CLAPPER IS DAMAGED, THE VALVE MUST BE REPLACED. A CAUTION Never apply any lubricant to seats, gaskets, or any internal operating parts of the valve. Petroleum -based grease or oil will damage rubber components and may prevent proper operation. 6-113 Maintenance (Refer to Figure 1) 1. Perform steps 1 through 6 of paragraph 6-A FIVE-YEAR INTERNAL INSPECTION. 2. To remove clapper rubber (9): a. Use the appropriate wrenches to loosen and remove button -head socket screw (7), hex nut (11), sealing washer (8), and rubber retainer (10). b. Remove the clapper rubber (9) for inspection. If the clapper rubber shows signs of wear, such as cracking, cuts, or ex- cessively deep grooves where the rubber contacts the water seat, replace the rubber. 3. To re -install clapper rubber (9): a. Place the clapper rubber (9) over the center hub of the rubber retainer (10). b. Position the retainer (10) (with rubber in place) against the clapper (2) as shown in Figure 1. c. Replace and tighten the button -head socket screw (7), sealing washer (8), and hex nut (11). The sealing washer (8) must be located on the top side of the clapper assembly (2) as shown in Figure 1. DO NOT over -tighten. 7. AVAILABILITY The Viking Check Valve is available through a network of domestic and international distributors. See The Viking Corporation website for closest distributor or contact The Viking Corporation. 8. GUARANTEES For details of warranty, refer to Viking's current list price schedule or contact Viking directly. Form No. F_032405 19.04.24 Rev 18.1 Page 3 of 3 4" CHECK VALVE Ki MODEL M-2 The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Drive, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services: 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-818-1680 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com Visit the Viking website for the latest edition of this technical data page www.vikinggroupinc.com THIS SIDE UP IN HORIZONTAL POSITION TO HEADER IN 4" VALVE ONLY VALVE ROOM 1 7 8 2 5 FROM FIRE 9 5/8 E2441 DEPARTMENT 3 CONNECTION (U 4 9 �0 11 Z°J AUTOMATIC DRIP CHECK 6 7/32 E1581 VIKING PART NUMBER 04292B DRAIN Figure 1 Item No. Part No. Description Material No. Req'd. 1 -- Body Ductile Iron, 64-45-12 1 2 -- Clapper Assembly Stainless Steel, UNS-S30400 1 3 -- Seat Brass, UNS-C83600 1 4 -- Pin Hinge, Clapper Stainless Steel, UNS-S30300 1 5 -- Spring Stainless Steel, UNS-S30200 1 6 -- Plug, 1/2" Galvanized Galvanized Steel 1 7 Screw, Socket Head, 3/8-24 x 1/2" Stainless Steel, UNS-S30400 1 8 Sealing Washer, 3/8" EPDM & Stainless Steel 1 9 Rubber EPDM 1 10 Retainer Stainless Steel, UNS-S30400 1 11 Jam Nut, 3/8"-24 Stainless Steel, UNS-S30400 1 Note: -- Indicates replacement part not available. * Indicates part is available in Sub -Assembly only --see Sub -Assembly list. SUB -ASSEMBLY LIST 7-11 13508 Rubber Repair Kit Form No. F_032405 19.04.24 Rev 18.1 Replaces Form No. F_032405 Rev P65 (Revised images and format; replaced PN 12337 with 22550.) 1011 T • Sizes ava inal) : DN20/3/4", DN25/1 DN32/1'/4", ", DN50/2", . • Pressure data : R factory set to operate at 12 bar (175 psi) • Finish : Red oxide approv er use. • Connections : Threaded NP Test & Drain with R&G -1011 SterialsList Item Description 1 Test and Drain Valve Bro2 Pressure Relief Valve (Mod. 7000) Bro3 Pressure Gauge 4 '/4" 3-Way Valve (Mod. 7600) Broy 5 1/2" x 11/2" NPT Nipple 6 '/2" x'/z" x'/4" Tee 7 '/4" Nipple 8 1/4" Plug 9 2'/2' NPT x Barb 90° Elbows 10 1 - Nylobraid Drain Tubing 11 2 x Clamps Test and Drain with Relief and Gauge -1011T U 0 D Z NIKJNG* SupplyNet Ln 90 M Ln Data Nominal Size Dimensions (mm / inch) Orifice Nominal K-Factor Refere inch A B C D E Metric us NPT Thread B DN20 3/4"' 256 / 10.3 84 / 3.4 119 / 8.8 114 / 4.5 334 / 13.4 40 2.8 1011 T-0750375 1011 T-07 keightMetric 57 4.2 1011 T-0750440 80 5.5 1011 T-075050 115 8.0 1011 T 0750530 1011 T 07505306 DN25 1 " 256 / 10.3 84 / 3.4 119 / 8.8 114 / 4.5 334 / 13.4 40 2.8 1011 T-0100375 1011 T-0100375B 2 2 / 4 8 57 4.2 1011 T-0100440 1011 T-0100440B 81 5.5 1011 T-0100500 1011 T-0100500B 115 8.0 1011 T-0100530 1011 T-0100530B DN32 1'/4- 263 / 10.5 91 / 3.6 225 / 9.0 139 / 5.6 363 / 14.5 40 2.8 1011T-0125375 1011T-0125375B 2 8 / 61 57 4.2 1011T-0125440 1011T-0125440B 80 5.5 1011 T-0125500 1011 T-0125500B 115 8.0 1011T-0125530 1011T-0125530B 161 11.2 1011 T-0125ELO 1011 T-0125ELOB 202 14.0 1011T-0125ESFR 1011T-0125ESFRB DN40 V/2' 288 / 11.5 97 / 3.9 242 / 9.7 206 / 8.3 447 / 17.9 40 2.8 1011T-0150375 1011T-0150375B 5.3 / 11.7 57 4.2 1011 T-0150440 1011 T-0150440B 80 5.5 1011 T-0150500 1011 T-0150500B 115 8.0 1011T-0150530 1011T-0150530B 161 11.2 1011 T-0150ELO 1011 T-0150ELOB 202 14.0 1011 T-0150ESFR 1011 T-0150ESFRB DN50 2" 288 / 11.5 97 / 3.9 242 / 9.7 206 / 8.3 447 / 17.9 40 2.8 1011 T-0200375 1011 T-0200375B 5.3 / 11.7 57 4.2 1011 T-0200440 1011 T-0200440B 80 5.5 1011 T-0200500 1011 T-0200500B 115 8.0 1011 T-0200530 1011 T-0200530B 161 11.2 1011 T-0200ELO 1011 T-0200ELOB 202 14.0 1011T-0200ESFR 1011T-0200ESFRB Worldwide Fire Protection Test & Drain Valves / Test & Drain Valves / 1011T www.vikingcorp.com ti Manufactured for Viking SupplyNet by AGF Manufacturing Inc. Refer to Manufacturers datasheet. Specifications subject to change without notice. (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection Features • Listed for indoor and outdoor use • Outdoor use requires BBK-1 or HC-BB weatherproof back box • Indoor use mounts directly to standard 4" box • Low current draw • High dB output • AC and DC models • DC models are motor driven, polarized, and have built in transient protection for supervised alarm circuits • Available in 6", 8" and 10" sizes Description These vibrating type bells are designed for use as fire or general signaling devices. They have low power consumption and high decibel ratings. The unit mounts on a standard 4" (101mm) square electrical box for indoor use or on a model BBK-1 or HC-BB weatherproof backbox for outdoor applications. Weatherproof backbox model BBK- 1 or HC-BB, Stock No. 1500001. Notes 1. Minimum dB ratings are calculated from integrated sound pressure measurements made at Underwriters Laboratories as specified in UL Standard 464. UL temperature range is -30' to 150°F (-34° to 66°C) 2. Typical dB ratings are calculated from measurements made with a conventional sound level meter and are indicative of output levels in an actual installation. 3. ULC only applies to PDC-DC bells. Size inches (mm) Voltage Model Number Stock Number Current (Max.) Typical dB at 10 ft. (3m) (2) Minimum dB at 10 ft. (3m) (1) 6 (150) 12VDC PDC-6-12 1750500 200mA 96 76 8 (200) 12VDC PDC-8-12 1750502 .200mA 96 77 10 (250) 12VDC PDC-10-12 1750504 .200mA 96 78 6 (150) 24VDC PDC-6-24 1750501 .20mA 95 77 8 (200) 24VDC PDC-8-24 1750503 20mA 83 79 10 (250) 24VDC PDC-10-24 1750505 20mA 85 80 6 (150) 24VAC PBA246 1806024* .17A 91 78 8 (200) 24VAC PBA248 1808024* .17A 94 77 10 (250) 24VAC PBA2410 1810024* .17A 94 78 6 (150) 120VAC PBA1206 1806120* .05A 92 83 8 (200) 120VAC PBA1208 1808120* .05A 99 84 10 (250) 120VAC PBA12010 1810120* .05A 99 86 All DC bells are polarized and have built-in transient protection. * Does not have ULC listing. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO BELLS PBA AC & PDC-DC * ** U` U C FM �: ®0 APPROVED $ * ULC on PDC-DC Only ** FM on PBA-AC Only Technical Specifications Dimensions 6" (150mm), 8" (200mm) and 10" (250mm) Cover: Steel Finish: Red Powder Coat Enclosure Base: non -corrosive composite material All parts have corrosion resistant finishes Model BBK-1 or HC-BB weatherproof backbox (optional) 24VAC Voltages Available 120VAC 12VDC (10.2 to 15.6) Polarized 24VDC (20.4 to 31.2) Polarized Indoor or outdoor use (See Note 1) Environmental -400 to 150OF (-400 to 66°C) Limitations (Outdoor use requires weatherproof backbox.) AC Bells - 4 No. 18 AWG stranded wires Termination DC Bells - 18 AWG stranded wire Service Use NFPA 13, 72, local AHJ *Specifications subject to change without notice. ' AWARNI� Installation must be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with all national and local codes and ordinances. • Shock hazard. Disconnect power source before servicing. Serious injury or death could result. Risk of explosion. Not for use in hazardous locations. Serious injury or death could result. WEE6:W:A:RNING In outdoor or wet installations, bell must be mounted with rweatherproof backbox, BBK-1 or HC-BB. Standard electrical boxes will not patherproofenclosure. If the bell and/or assembly is exposed to moisture,r create an electrical hazard. Phone: 800-325-3936 www.pottersignal.com 5400777 - REV A • 12/20 PAGE 1 OF 2 (E)POTTER BELLS The Symbol of Protection PBA AC & PDC-DC Installation The bell shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13, 72, or local AHJ. The top of the device shall be no less than 90" AFF and not less than 6" below the ceiling. 1. Remove the gong. 2. Connect wiring (see Fig. 3). 3. Mount bell mechanism to backbox (bell mechanism must be mounted with the striker pointing down). 4. Reinstall the gong (be sure that the gong positioning pin, in the mechanism housing, is in the hole in the gong). 5. Test all bells for proper operation and observe that they can be heard where required (bells must be heard in all areas as designated by the authority having jurisdiction). Weatherproof Backbox Dimensions WARNING Inches (mm)WF.i1tuue,. striker down will prevent bell from ringing. MODEL BBK-1 OR HC-BB Fig 2 Bell Dimension Inches (mm) Fig 1 "A" O(146 mm) 10" (250mm) 8„----� — (200 mm) 6" 1 (150 mm) � (41 mm) L 2 11/16" (68 mm) DWGq 776-1 Wiring Rear View Fig 3 D.C. BELLS (OBSERVE POLARITY) A.C. BELLS 338' (86 —) 4 1/4" (108 —) 3 3/8" 5" (86—) (127—) RED (IN) RED (OUT) WHITE (IN) WHITE (OUT) 0 0 FROM CONTROL PANEL CIB EXT BELL FROM CONTROL PANEL OR D-OF-LINE OR PRECEDING BELL SISTOR PRECEDING BELL BLACK (IN) T) BLACK (IN) CBLACK CAUTION• WHEN ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION 15 REQUIRED USE IN AND OUT LEADS AS SHOWN. NOTES: CAUTION; WHEN ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION IS REQUIRED USE IN AND OUT LEADS AS SHOWN - NOTES: 1. OBSERVE POLARITY TO RING D.C. BELLS. 1. WHEN USING A.C. BELLS, TERMINATE EACH EXTRA WIRE SEPERATELY 2. RED WIRES POSITIVE (+). AFTER LAST BELL. 3. BLACK WIRES NEGATIVE (-). 2. END -OF -LINE RESISTOR IS NOT REQUIRED ON AC BELLS . 4. EOL RESISTOR IS SUPPLIED BY FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 800-325-3936 www.pottersignal.com 5400777 - REV A • 12/20 PAGE 2 OF 2 CrPOTTER The Symbol of Protection Specifications subject to change Ordering Information Nominal Pipe Size Model Part Number 2" DN50 VSR-2 1144402 21/2" DN65 VSR-2 1/2 1144425 3" DN80 VSR-3 1144403 3 1/2" VSR-3 1/2 1144435 4" DN100 VSR-4 1144404 5" VSR-5 1144405 6" DN150 VSR-6 1144406 8" DN200 VSR-8 1144408 Optional: Cover Tamper Switch Kit, stock no. 0090148 Replaceable Components: Retard/Switch Assembly, stock no. 1029030 VSR VANE TYPE WATERFLOW ALARM SWITCH WITH RETARD UL, CUL and CSFM Listed, FM Approved, LPCBApproved, For CE Marked (EN12259-5) / VdS Approved model use VSR-EU Service Pressure: 450 PSI (31 BAR) - UL Flow Sensitivity Range for Signal: 4-10 GPM (15-38 LPM) -UL Maximum Surge: 18 FPS (5.5 m/s) Contact Ratings: Two sets of SPDT (Form C) 10.0Amps at 125/250VAC 2.0 Amps at 30VDC Resistive 10 mAmps min. at 24VDC Conduit Entrances: Two knockouts provided for 1/2" conduit. Individual switch compartments suitable for dissimilar voltages. Environmental Specifications: • NEMA 4/IP54 Rated Enclosure suitable for indoor or outdoor use with factory installed gasket and die-cast housing when used with appropriate conduit fitting. • Temperature Range: 40°F - 120°F, (4.5°C - 49°C) - UL • Non -corrosive sleeve factory installed in le. Service Use: National Fire Alarm • Installation must be performed by qualifiedJ11OPWnd in accordance with all national and local codes SWordinances. • Shock hazard. Disconnect power source before servicing. Serious injury or death could result. • Risk of explosion. Not for use in hazardous locations. Serious injury or death could result. CAUTION Waterflow switches that are monitoring wet pipe sprinkler systems shall not be used as the sole initiating device to discharge AFFF, deluge, or chemical suppression systems. Waterflow switches used for this application may result in unintended discharges caused by surges, trapped air, or short retard times. Important: This document contains important information on the installation and operation of the VSR waterflow switches. Please read all instructions carefully before beginning installation. A copy of this document is required by NFPA 72 to be maintained on site. General Information Enclosure The Model VSR is a vane type waterflow switch for use on wet sprinkler The VSR switches and retard device are enclosed in a general purpose, systems. It is UL Listed for use on a steel pipe; schedules 5 through 40, die-cast housing. The cover is held in place with two tamper resistant sizes 2" - 6" and is UL Listed and FM Approved for use on steel pipe; screws which require a special key for removal. A field installable schedules 10 through 40, sizes 2" thru 8" (50 mm thm 200 mm). LPC cover tamper switch is available as an option which may be used approved sizes are 2" thru 8" (50 mm thru 200 mm). See Ordering to indicate unauthorized removal of the cover. See bulletin number Information chart. 5401103 for installation instructions of this switch. The VSR may also be used as a sectional waterflow detector on large systems. The VSR contains two single pole, double throw, snap action switches and an adjustable, instantly recycling pneumatic retard. The switches are actuated when a flow of 10 GPM (38 LPM) or more occurs downstream of the device. The flow condition must exist for a period of time necessary to overcome the selected retard period. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC • St. Louis, MO • Phone: 866-956-1211/Canada 888-882-1833 • www.pottersignal.com PRINTED IN USA MFG. #5401146 - REV M PAGE 1 OF 4 11115 (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection VSR VANE TYPE WATERFLOW ALARM SWITCH WITH RETARD Installation (see Fig. 1) These devices may be mounted on horizontal or vertical pipe. On horizontal pipe they shall be installed on the top side of the pipe where they will be accessible. The device should not be installed within 6" (15 cm) of a fitting which changes the direction of the waterflow or within 24" (60 cm) of a valve or drain. NOTE: Do not leave cover off for an extended period of time. Drain the system and drill a hole in the pipe using a hole saw in a slow speed drill (see Fig. 1). Clean the inside pipe of all growth or other material for a distance equal to the pipe diameter on either side of the hole. Roll the vane so that it may be inserted into the hole; do not bend or crease it. Insert the vane so that the arrow on the saddle points in the direction of the waterflow. Take care not to damage the non -corrosive bushing in the saddle. The bushing should fit inside the hole in the pipe. Install the saddle strap and tighten nuts alternately to required torque (see the chart in Fig. 1). The vane must not rub the inside of the pipe or bind in any way. A CAUTION Do not trim the paddle. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the device from operating and will void the warranty. Do not obstruct or otherwise prevent the trip stem of the flow switch from moving when water flows as this could damage the flow switch and prevent an alarm. If an alarm is not desired, a qualified technician should disable the alarm system. Fig. 1 Retard Adjustment DO NOT LEAVE COVER OFF FOR aNEXTENDED PER7oDOFTIME The delay can be adjusted by rotating the retard adjustment knob from 0 to the max setting (60-90 seconds). The time delay should be set at the minimum required to prevent false alarms DIRECTION OF WATERFLOW TIGHTEN NUTS ALTERNATELY O MOUNT ON PIPE SO ARROW ON SADDLE POINTS IN DIRECTION l \ OF WATERFLOW CAUTION Hole must be drilled perpendicular to the pipe and vertically centered. Refer to the Compatible Pipe/Installation Requirements chart for size. Correct Incorrect I -E��- _E7�_ ROLL PADDLE IN OPPOSITE DIRECTION OF WATERFLOW (Flowing water activates device in one direction only) DWG t146-1t fm 50- ADAPTER ADAPTER 20=+2- MAX. DN50 ONLY USE (2) 5180162 ADAPTERS AS SHOWN ABOVE DWG# 1146-IF Compatible Pipe/ Installation Requirements Model Nominal Pipe Size Nominal Pipe O.D. Pipe Wall Thickness Hole Size U-Bolt Nuts Torque Lightwall Schedule 10 (iIL) Schedule 40 (UL) BS-1387 (LPC) DN (VDS) inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch min inch mm ft-lb n-m VSR-2 2 DN50 2.375 60.3 .065 1.651 0.109 2.77 0.154 3.91 0.142 3.6 0.091 2.3 1.25 +.125/- 062 33.0 2.0 VSR-21/2 2.5 2.875 73.0 .084 2.134 0.120 3.05 0.203 5.16 - - - - VSR-21/2 - DN65 3.000 76.1 - - - - - - 0.142 3.6 0.102 2.6 VSR-3 3 DN80 3.500 88.9 .083 2.108 0.120 3.05 0.216 5.49 0.157 4.0 0.114 2.9 2.00±.125 50.8t2.0 20 27 VSR-31/2 3.5 - 4.000 101.6 - - 0.120 3.05 0.226 5.74 - - - - VSR-4 4 DN100 4.500 114.3 .084 2.134 0.120 3.05 0.237 6.02 0.177 4.5 0.126 3.2 VSR-5 5 - 5.563 141.3 - - 0.134 3.40 0.258 6.55 - - - - VSR-6 6 DN150 6.625 168.3 .115 2.921 0.134 3.40 0.280 7.11 0.197 5.0 0.157 4.0 VSR-8 8 DN200 8.625 219.1 - - 0.148 3.76 1 0.322 1 8.18 0.248 6.3 0.177 4.5 NOTE: For copper or plastic pipe use Model VSR-CF. PRINTED IN USA MFG. #5401146 - REV M PAGE 2 OF 4 11115 CF�)POTTER The Symbol of Protection Fig. 2 To remove knockouts: Place screwdriver at inside edge of knockouts, not in the center. Do not drill into the base as this creates metal shavings which can create electrical hazards and damage the device. Drilling voids the warranty. Fig. 3 Break out thin section of cover when wiring both switches from one conduit entrance. Fig. 5 Typical Electrical Connections Notes: 1. The Model VSR has two switches, one can be used to operate a central station, proprietary or remote signaling unit, while the other contact is used to operate a local audible or visual annunciator. 2. For supervised circuits, see "Switch Terminal Connections" drawing and warning note (Fig. 4). rasa VSR VANE TYPE WATERFLOW ALARM SWITCH WITH RETARD Fig. 4 Switch Terminal Connections Clamping Plate Terminal � % I�CO�IIj6 �0,0G DWG. #1146-16 AWNNING M An uninsulated section of a single conductor should not be looped around the terminal and serve as two separate connections. The wire must be severed, thereby providing supervision of the connection in the event that the wire become dislodged from under the terminal. Failure to sever the wire may render the device inoperable risking severe property damage and loss of life. Do not strip wire beyond 3/8" of length or expose an uninsulated conductor beyond the edge of the terminal block. When using stranded wire, capture all strands under the clamping plate. NEUTRAL FROM BREAKER NEUTRAL FROM BELL 1 BREAKER J LINE FROM BREAKER EOL (End Of Line Resistor) NOTE: When connecting to a UL Listed control panel, use the panel's resistor value for circuit supervision. Testing The frequency of inspection and testing for the Model VSR and its associated protective monitoring system shall be in accordance with applicable NFPA Codes and Standards and/or the authority having jurisdiction (manufacturer recommends quarterly or more frequently). If provided, the inspector's test valve shall always be used for test purposes. If there are no provisions for testing the operation of the flow detection device on the system, application of the VSR is not recommended or advisable. A minimum flow of 10 GPM (38 LPM) is required to activate this device. Advise the person responsible for testing of the fire protection system that this system must be tested in accordance with the testing instructions. Fig. 6 Mounting Dimensions 5.56 in Fig. 7 3.50 in (141.2 mtn) 2.00 in r (89.0 —)y (50.8 mm) GREEN GROUND SCREWS 2.34 in (59.4 —) PI E DIA. U-BOLT NUT + 5.25 in U-BOLT WASHER (+ 33.4 —) PIPE SADDLE q� PIPE t t PLASTIC PADDLE ® 4) Q DWG. 11d8-id U-BOLT NOMINAL PIPE DIA. +L75 in (+44.5 MM) FOR DN 50 — DN 65 2-2.5 m NOMINAL PIPE DIA. +2.I25 in (+54.0 MM) FOR DN 80 — DN 200 3-8 in OWG 1146-15 PRINTED IN USA MFG. #5401146 - REV M PAGE 3 OF 4 11115 (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection VSR VANE TYPE WATERFLOW ALARM SWITCH WITH RETARD Maintenance Inspect detectors monthly. If leaks are found, replace the detector. The VSR waterflow switch should provide years of trouble -free service. The retard and switch assembly are easily field replaceable. In the unlikely event that either component does not perform properly, please order replacement retard switch assembly stock #1029030 (see Fig. 8). There is no maintenance required, only periodic testing and inspection. Retard/Switch Assembly Replacement (See Fig. 8) The Retard/Switch Assembly is field -replaceable without draining the system or removing the waterflow switch from the pipe 1. Make sure the fire alarm zone or circuit connected to the waterflow switch is bypassed or otherwise taken out of service. 2. Disconnect the power source for local bell (if applicable). 3. Identify and remove all wires from the waterflow switch. 4. Remove the (2) mounting screws holding retard/switch assembly to the base. Do not remove the (2) retard housing screws. 5. Remove the retard assembly by lifting it straight up over the tripstem. 6. Install the new retard assembly. Make sure the locating pins on the retard/switch assembly fit into the locating pin bosses on the base. 7. Re -install the (2) original mounting screws. 8. Reconnect all wires. Perform a flow test and place the system back in service. Fig. 8 DO NOT REMO'V (2) RETARD HOL SCREWS Removal of Waterflow Switch REMOVE (2) ORIGINAL MOUNTING SCREWS HOLDING RETARD/SWITCH ASSEMBLY TO BASE BREAK OUTTHIN SECTION OF COVER WHEN WIRING BOTH SWITCHES FROM ONE CONDUIT ENTRANCE. (2) ORIGINAL MOUNTING CREWS RETARD/SWITCH ASSEMBLY (2) LOCATING PINS/ Li n (2) LOCATR BOSSES IN DWG# 1146-10 • To prevent accidental water damage, all control valves should be shut tight and the system completely drained before waterflow detectors are removed or replaced. • Turn off electrical power to the detector, then disconnect wiring. • Loosen nuts and remove U-bolts. • Gently lift the saddle far enough to get your fingers under it. With your fingers, roll the vane so it will fit through the hole while continuing to lift the waterflow detector saddle. • Lift detector clear of pipe. PRINTED IN USA MFG. #5401146 - REV M PAGE 4 OF 4 11115 RISER CLAMPS Z ,& VIL Fig. 261 (Formerly Afcon Fig. 400) Size Range: 3/4" through 24" Material: Carbon steel Finish:❑ Plain,❑ Hot -Dip Galvanized with Zinc Plated Bolts & Nuts ❑ Epoxy Coated or ❑ Painted. Service: For support of stationary steel pipe risers, cast iron pipe or conduit. This product is not intended for use with hanger rods. For this application refer to Fig. 40 Riser Clamp, page 49. Maximum Temperature: Plain 650' F, Galvanized and Epoxy 450' F Approvals: Complies with Federal Specification A-A-1192A (Type 8) WW-H-777-E (Type 8), ANSI/MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58 (Type 8). UL, ULC Listed (Sizes 1'/2" - 8"). Extension Pipe or Riser Clamp Note: Refer to Technical Data Section of the Pipe Hanger Catalog for cast iron soil pipe data. Installation: Clamp is fitted and bolted preferably below a coupling, hub or welded lugs on steel pipe. Bolt torques should be per industry standards (see page 248). Clamp is designed for standard steel pipe O.D. and this must be considered in sizing the riser for other types of piping. Ordering: Specify pipe size, figure number, name and finish. B L FIG. 261: DIMENSIONS (IN) • LOADS (LBS) • TORQUE (FT-LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) Pipe Size Max Load Weight 9 L G Width B C Bolt Diameter Torque Values 3/a 220 1.1 8'/a 1 2/81 3/a 3/s 21 1.1 31/s 11/a 250 1.6 10 31/2 1'/ 1.6 101/a 3'/a 2 300 1.7 41/a '/x '/s 32 21/2 400 1.9 11'/a 43/a 3 500 1.9 11 % 51/2 31/ 600 2.3 127/a 6'/ 1/2 1/2 46 4 750 2.4 7 5 1,500 3.6 133/a 11/2 8 6 1,600 4.0 143/a 9 8 2,500 7.6 18'/ 12 100 10 11.1 201/a 2 133/a 12 2,700 16.5 223/a 153/a 14 17.7 24 171/a 16 2,900 30.4 26 2'/2 193/a 3/a 3/a 150 18 33.8 28 213/a 20 1 35.0 1 30 233/a 24 3,200 1 82.0 1 363/a 3 30 1 1 17A 190 PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL ❑ Approved Address: ❑Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH-1.18 RISER CLAMPS Z /ANVIL Fig. 40 Riser Clamp - Standard Size Range: 2" through 24" Material: Carbon steel (CS), Alloy (A), or Stainless Steel (SS) Finish:❑ Plain or❑ Hot -Dip Galvanized with Zinc Plated Fasteners Maximum Temperature: Galvanized 450' F, 650' F (CS), 950° F (A) and 1,000° F (SS) Service: Riser clamps are used for the support of vertical piping. Load is carried by shear lugs which are welded to the pipe. Shear lugs provided upon request. Local pipe wall stress evaluation available upon request. Approvals: Complies with Federal Specification A-A-1192A (Type 42), ANSI/MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58 (Type 42). Ordering: Specify pipe size, material, figure number, name and finish. Note: If different loads or dimensions are required, refer to Fig. 40 SD special design riser clamp. TUD DIA. F S :;::;04SP1PTPACER A f O O+ G (max) B E E— CtoC Sizes 20" to 24" have (4) inner bolts. Field Welded Shear Lugs 140, 146 Fig. 290 Fig. 40 FIG. 40: DIMENSIONS (IN) a LOADS (LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) Max Load A Maximum Weight Each Pipe Size C-C E F (Max) G (Max) S A (CS) (alloy) (SS) B (Max) Rigid Spring CS SS Alloy y Assembly Assembly 2 900 1,800 18 9 % 21/2 3/a 11/a 1/s 2 18 15 18 21/2 20 10 20 20 20 3 1,500 3,000 % 3 1 '/2 30 25 30 2,200 4,400 22 11 1% 40 40 44 5 4 2 45 40 45 6 3,000 6,000 24 12 5/a 1 �/a 1�/a 60 60 73 8 27 131/2 5 82 82 82 10 5,500 11,000 30 15 7/8 6 11/2 11/a 11/a 157 157 157 12 7,800 15,600 32 16 1 7 13/a 1% 17/a /2 216 202 250 14 34 17 1% 228 228 263 16 9,000 18,000 36 18 11/87 62 2 11/2 2 314 277 315 18 39 191/2 338 338 377 20 13,500 27,000 42 21 2 10 2�/z 1 2% 2% 41/a 525 525 580 24 45 22�/2 11 621 565 681 PROJECTO•APPROVAL Project: ❑ Approved Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH-12.19 BEAM CLAMPS Z ANVIL Fig. 92 (Formerly Afcon Fig. 100) Universal C-type Clamp (Standard Throat) Size Range: 3/8" and'/2" Material: Ductile iron, hardened steel cup point set screw and locknut. Finish:❑ Plain or❑ Zinc Plated (Hot -Dip Galvanized optional) Service: Recommended for use under roof installations with bar joist type construction, or for attachment to the top or bottom flange of structural shapes where the vertical hanger rod is required to be offset from the edge of the flange and where the thickness of joist or flange does not exceed s/4". Approvals: Complies with Federal Specification A-A-1192A (Type 19 & 23) WW-H-777-E (Type 23), ANSI/MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58 (Type 19 & 23). UL, ULC Listed and FM Approved. How to size: Size of clamp is determined by size of rod to be used. Installation: Follow recommended set screw torque values per MSS-SP-69. Features: • They may be attached to horizontal flanges of structural members in either the top beam or bottom beam positions. • Secured in place by a cup -pointed Set Screw tightened against the flange. A Jam Nut is provided for tightening the Set Screw against the Body Casting. • Thru tapping of the body casting permits extended adjustment of the threaded rod. • Can be used with Fig 89X retaining clip for seismic applications. Ordering: Specify rod size, figure number, name of clamp and finish. E AT LEAST ONE G FULL THREAD OF ROD MUST BE EXPOSED 3/4" D BODY - CASTING JAM - NUT -A SET SCREW C UL us <FM> LISTED APPROVED FIG. 92: DIMENSIONS (IN) • LOAD (LBS) • TORQUE (IN-LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) Rod Size A Set Screw Size Torque Value Max Loads ■ Weight C D E F G H Top Bottom 3/8 3/8 60 500 250 0.34 15/ 6 19/ 6 9/ 6 13/ 6 % 1/2 1/z 1/2 125 950 760 0.63 1% 113/16 1/2 11/16 7/6 23/32 ■ Maximum temperature of 450° F PROJECT1 1APPROVAL Project: ❑ Approved Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH-1.18 Description FPPI Drop -In Anchors and Mini Drop -In Anchors are UL listed in accordance with NFPA requirements. Zinc plating provides corrosion resistance. Follow NFPA requirements and installation instructions for proper use. Installation Instructions: STEP 1 Using a masonry bit suitable for the material being drilled, drill an appropriate diameter hole at the correct depth according to the table below. Anchor Size Drill Size Minimum Hole Depth 3/8" Standard 1/2" 19/16" 1/2" Standard 5/8" 2" 3/8" Mini 1/2" 3/ " STEP 2 Insert the anchor into the hole until the edge of the anchor is flush` with the surface of the material the anchor is being installed in. 'The Anchor may be installed at a greater depth by drilling the hole to the desired depth and threading the correct size bolt for the size anchor being installed and tapping the anchor into the drilled hole. STEP 3 After inserting the anchor to the desired depth, insert the correct size setting tool into the anchor and drive the plug into the anchor until the shoulder of the setting tool meets the edge of the anchor. The anchor is now installed and ready to be used. Note: It is recommended that when used in cinder block, that the anchor be placed between the cells. Average Pullout Values For 4000psi Concrete Part Number Bolt Size Pullout Value Standard Drop -In 05-470-00 3/8" 5,530lbs 05-471-00 1/2" 8,080 Ibs Mini Drop -In 05-472-00 3/8" 1,980lbs 3198 LIONSHEAD AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92010 + 1 (760) 599-1168 + 1 (800) 344-1822 + 1 (800) 344-3775 FAX 0 2017 Fire Protection Products, Inc. Specifications Materials: Zinc Plated Steel Part Numbers: 05-470-00 3/8" 05-471-00 1/2" 05-472-00 3/8", mini Use With: 05-475-00 Setting Tool 3/8" 05-474-00 Setting Tool 1/2" 05-476-00 Setting Tool 3/8", mini U� LISTED RING HANGERS Fig. 69 (Formerly Afcon Fig. 300) Adjustable Swivel Ring, Tapped Per NFPA Standards Size Range:'/2" through 8" Material: Carbon steel Finish: Strap is Pre -Galvanized Zinc Material. Nut is Zinc Plated. Service: Recommended for suspension of non -insulated stationary pipe line. Maximum Temperature: 450' F Approvals: Complies with Federal Specification A-A-1192A (Type 10), WW-H-171-E (Type 10), and ANSI/MSS SP-58 (Type 10). UL Listed and FM Approved (Sizes 3/4" - 8"). Features: • '/2" - 2" sizes designed for use with steel and CPVC piping and manufactured with FBC System Compatible oil. • Threads are countersunk so that they cannot become burred or damaged. • Knurled swivel nut provides vertical adjustment after piping is in place. • Captured swivel nut in the'/2" through 6" sizes. The capture is permanent in the bottom portion of the band, allowing the hanger to be opened during installation if desired, but not allowing the nut to fall completely out. Ordering: Specify size, figure number and name. A Non -captured nut also available upon request. ! IA�- ECF G '/2" through 1" pipe -, A I*- 1'/4" through 2" pipe 2'/2" through 8" pipe FIG. 69: DIMENSIONS (IN) • LOADS (LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) Pipe Size Max Load Weight RodSizeB C F Width 1/2 300 0.10 % 2�/8 2 19/6 e /s 8/4 0.10 23/4 1'/8 1,/16 1 0.10 29/6 111/6 1 0.10 2% 1'A 7 /8 11/2 0.10 23/4 17/8 2 0.11 31/4 2% 11/8 21/2 525 0.20 4 23/4 1 s/ 6 3/a 3 0.20 313/16 215/16 1,/16 4 650 0.30 411/16 313/s 1,/16 5 1,000 0.54 1/2 51/16 4% 6 0.65 611/16 59/6 21/4 8 1.00 8'/16 7'/16 31/4 '/2" through 2" Size Rounded Edge Design C UL us FM LISTED APPROVED 2'/2" through 8" Size PROJECT1 1APPROVAL Project: ❑ Approved Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH-1.18 1 4 16 11811[ Fig. 98 - Rod Stiffener Fig. 98B - Rod Stiffener w/Break-off Bolt Head Size Range — Secures 3/8" thru 7/8" hanger rod Material — Carbon Steel Function — Secures channel to hanger rod for vertical seismic bracing. Approvals — Included in our Seismic Restraints Catalog approved by the State of California Office of Statewide Health Plannina and Development (OSHPD). For additional load, spacing and placement information relatina to OSHPD aroiects. alease refer to the TOLCO Seismic Restraint S stems Guidelines Component of State of California OSHPD Approved Seismic Restraints System Y Finish — Electro Galvanized Note — Available in HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By — Figure number Fif Fig. 99 - All Thread Rod Cut to Length Size Range — Secures 3/8" thru 7/8" rod in 1 " increments Material — Carbon Steel Maximum Temperature — 750°F Finish — Plain Note — Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By — Figure number, rod diameter, rod length and finish Fig. 100 -All Thread Rod F1111 Lpnnth Size Range — Secures 3/8" thru 11/2" rod in 10' lengths Material — Carbon Steel Maximum Temperature — 750°F Finish — Plain Note — Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By — Figure number, rod diameter and finish FIG. 98 Dimensions Rod Max. Rec. Load Lbs. Size For Service Temp 650°F 3/8 730 112 1350 5/8 2160 3/4 3230 7/8 4480 Dimensions • Weights Max Rec. Load Lbs. Rod For Service Temps Approx. Size 650°F Wt./100 1/4 240 12 3/8 730 29 1 /2 1350 53 5/8 2160 84 3/4 3230 123 7/8 4480 169 1 5900 222 11/4 9500 360 1 1/2 13800 510 m OFFICE/MANUFACTURING FACILITY • 1375 SAMPSON AVF. • CORONA, CA 92879 • PH: 951.737.5599 • FAX: 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800.786.5266 www.tolco.com The Quick Grip Lateral Brace, part of the nVent CADDY line of fire sprinkler bracing systems from nVent, is designed to help simplify installations when bracing service pipe for seismic or other catastrophic events. It features an innovative design for quick attachment of brace pipe to service pipe saving time and money. CERTIFICATIONS Ue u L L APPROVED FEATURES Easy two-step installation eliminates extra trips between structure and service pipe Works with 1" and 1 1/4" (25 mm and 32 mm) brace pipes to reduce inventory Yellow tips provide a visual indicator that the bolts have been properly torqued Easy installation with an impact wrench from the bottom side of the clamp Meets NFPAO-13 requirements for seismic sway bracing Meets CEN/TS 17551:2021 requirements for Seismic Sway Bracing SPECIFICATIONS Finish Electrogalvanized Material Steel Catalog Number Pipe Size Width(W) Height(H) CSBQG0250EG 2 1/2" 6 3/4" 5 7/16" — 5 7/8" CSB000300EG 3" 7 1/2" 6 1/8" — 6 1/2" CSBQG0400EG 4" 8 3/4" 7 1/8" — 7 1/2" Catalog Number Pipe Size Width(W) Height(H) CSBQG0600EG 6" 11 3/4" 9 1/4" — 9 5/8" CSBQG0800EG 8" 13 7/8" 11 3/8" — 11 13/16" DIAGRAMS �y i WARNING nVent products shall be installed and used only as indicated in nVent's product instruction sheets and training materials. Instruction sheets are available at www.nvent.com and from your nVent customer service representative. Improper installation, misuse, misapplication or other failure to completely follow nVent's instructions and warnings may cause product malfunction, property damage, serious bodily injury and death and/or void your warranty. North America +1.800.753.9221 Option 1 — Customer Care Option 2 — Technical Support Europe Netherlands: +31 800-0200135 France: +33 800 901 793 Europe Germany: 8001890272 Other Countries: +31 13 5835404 APAC Shanghai: + 86 21 2412 1618/19 Sydney: +61 2 9751 8500 CERTIFICATIONS Ue OL L APPROVED FEATURES Universal design allows one product to attach directly to concrete, wood, bar joist or I-beam adapters Integrated angle gauge easily displays brace member angle of installation Snap -off bolt head helps enable easy installation and inspection of seismic sway braces Works with 1 " through 2" brace pipes to reduce inventory Low profile minimizes prying effect on concrete fasteners Meets NFPA® 13 as pre -qualified for seismic applications FM® Specification Tested SPECIFICATIONS Finish Electrogalvanized Material Steel Catalog Hole Size(HS) Width(W) Number CSBU1 9/16" 115/16" Thickness(T 3/16' A E D C B 21/16" 1 3/4" 11/4" 1 3/8" 1 5/16" UL Listed Load 2,000 lb Catalog Number CSBU2 DIAGRAMS WARNING Hole Slze(HS) Width(W) j hickness(T A E D c g UL Listed Load 13/16" 115/16" 3/16" 21/16" 1 3/4" 11/4" 1 3/8" 1 5/16" 2,000lb nVent products shall be installed and used only as indicated in nVent's product instruction sheets and training materials Instruction sheets are available at www.nvent.com and from your nVent customer service representative. Improper installation, misuse, misapplication or other failure to completely follow nVent's instructions and warnings may cause product malfunction, property damage, serious bodily injury and death and/or void your warranty. North America Europe +1.800.753.9221 Netherlands: Option 1 — Customer Care +31 800-0200135 Option 2 — Technical Support France: +33 800 901 793 Europe Germany: 8001890272 Other Countries: +31 13 5835404 APAC Shanghai: + 86 21 2412 1618/19 Sydney: +61 2 9751 8500 CERTIFICATIONS Ue OL L APPROVED FEATURES Use for both lateral and longitudinal sway brace applications Unique slotted holes provide for easy slip-on installation eliminating loose hardware Snap -off bolt head helps enable easy installation and inspection of seismic sway braces Works with 1 " through 2" brace pipes to reduce inventory Meets NFPAO-13 requirements for seismic sway bracing FMO Specification Tested Meets CEN/TS 17551:2021 requirements for Seismic Sway Bracing SPECIFICATIONS Finish Electrogalvanized Material Steel Catalog Pipe Brace Width( Angle( Number Size Pipe W� a) A B C D Certifications Size CSB0100 1" V - 2" 1 1/2" 45° 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 5/8" 5" cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM Approved, Seismic Catalog Pipe Brace Pipe Width( Angle( Number Size Size W) a) CSBO125 1 1/4" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45' CSB0150 1 1/2" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45' CSB0200 2" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45° CSB0250 2 1/2" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45' CSB0300 3" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45' CSB0500 5" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45' CSB1000 10" V — 2" 1 1/2" 45' CSB1200 12" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45° CSB0400 4" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45' CSB0600 6" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45' CSB0800 8" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 45' ADDITIONAL PRODUCT DETAILS A B C D Certifications cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 11/16" 5 1/2" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 3/4" 5 3/8" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 13/16" 6" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 15/16" 6 3/4" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 1" 7 3/8" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 1" 10 1/16" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 1" 15 3/16" Approved, Seismic OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" V 16 7/8" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 1 1/16" 8 1/2" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 1 1/8" 10 7/8" Approved, Seismic cUL, UL, OSHPD/HCAI, FM 3 9/16" 1 5/16" 1 1/4" 13" Approved, Seismic FM® Specification Tested for 1-1/2" to 4" pipe sizes using no hub cast iron pipe. Load ratings for Sch 10 may also be applied to AS 1074 Medium, GB/T 3091, EN 10255 (Medium or Heavy), and JIS G3452 pipe. Load ratings for Sch 40 may also be applied to AS 1074 Heavy, GB/T 3091, EN 10255 (Heavy), and JIS G3454 pipe. Load ratings for FM approved lightwall may also be applied to AS 1074 Lightwall, EN 10255 L,-EN 10220, and GB/T 8163 pipe. DIAGRAMS n A t?ti Q C 2 WARNING nVent products shall be installed and used only as indicated in nVent's product instruction sheets and training materials. Instruction sheets are available at www.nvent.com and from your nVent customer service representative. Improper installation, misuse, misapplication or other failure to completely follow nVent's instructions and warnings may cause product malfunction, property damage, serious bodily injury and death and/or void your warranty. North America +1.800.753.9221 Option 1 — Customer Care Option 2 — Technical Support Europe Netherlands: +31 800-0200135 France: +33 800 901 793 Europe Germany: 8001890272 Other Countries: +31 13 5835404 APAC Shanghai: + 86 21 2412 1618/19 Sydney: +61 2 9751 8500 Description Fire Protection Products, Inc. Spare Sprinkler Head Cabinets are designed to allow for spare sprinkler head storage as required by NFPA guidelines. The Spare Sprinkler Head Cabinets are available in six configurations. Three head, six head, six head ESFR, twelve head, twenty-four head, and thirty-six head. All six styles are manufactured with "knockouts" to accommodate the most common size sprinklers. The shelf is positioned to allow for the storage of a typical sprinkler head wrench. Each cabinet is finished in red enamel. Each spare head cabinet comes with a hinged door which remains closed to protect the spare sprinklers from the elements and features holes on the back panel to allow for attachment to most surfaces utilizing the appropriate fasteners. Not intended for exposed or harsh environments. Installation Select the correct Spare Sprinkler Head Cabinet in accordance with the Automatic Sprinkler Systems Handbook. As per the 1989 Edition the correct number of spare sprinkler is as follows: 0-300 sprinklers, not less than 6; 300-1000, not less than 12; 1000 or more, not less than 24. Stock of spare sprinklers shall include all types and ratings installed.* Once the correct Spare Sprinkler Head Cabinet has been selected, installation is accomplished by inserting the correct fastener in each of the holes inside the cabinet, securing the cabinet securely to the wall. Insert the correct number and type of sprinklers in accordance with the "handbook". `Final determination is subject to approval by the AHJ. 3198 LIONSHEAD AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92010 TEL + 1 760 599-1168 + 1 800 344-1822 FAX + 1 800 344-3775 © 2016 Fire Protection Products, Inc. Specifications Material: Steel - 22 Gauge Finish: Red enamel Styles: 3 Spare sprinklers,'/2 or 3/4 6 Spare sprinklers,'/2 or 3/4 6 Spare, ESFR, 1/2, 3/4 or 1" 12 Spare sprinklers'/2 or 3/4 24 Spare sprinklers 36 Spare sprinklers F P P I Cabinet Type Length Depth Height 4" 12 head cabinet 141/4" 5'/a" 107/,1, (02-400-00) 2 7/16 5 1/4" 10 1/4" 6 head cabinet 14 1/4" (02-401-00) 7 6/16' 3 head cabinet 2 1/2 5 1/4" 10 1/4" (02-402-00) 14 1/a" 3 3/16' ESFR cabinet, 6 head 6 1/2" 12 3/a" (02-403-00) 141/4" 4" 24 head cabinet 87/ " 17" (02-404-00) 16 12'/16' 4" 36 head cabinet 11 3/4" 2611/16' (02-405-00) (Length open) 3198 LIONSHEAD AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92010 TEL + 1 760 599-1168 + 1 800 344-1822 FAX + 1 800 344-3775 0 2016 Fire Protection Products, Inc "Len LIP "Depth" "Height Open" Item Numbers 02-400-00 to 02-404-00 3198 LIONSHEAD AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92010 TEL + 1 760 599-1168 + 1 800 344-1822 FAX + 1 800 344-3775 0 2016 Fire Protection Products, Inc. "Height Closed" F P P "Length Open" Item Number 02-405-00 3198 LIONSHEAD AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92010 TEL + 1 760 599-1168 + 1 800 344-1822 FAX + 1 800 344-3775 "Depth" "Height" Model FPPI-PG Description Model FPPI-PG pressure gauges feature an impact and corrosion resistant case made from ABS (plastic) or powder coated steel. Features phosphor bronze bourdon tube movement with white enameled brass dial face with large numbers for easy reading. Dual scale to 300 PSI/2000Kpa. UL/ULc Listed (EX26630) and FM Approved. Applications • Fire sprinkler systems • Suitable for all media that will not obstruct the pressure system or attack copper alloy parts Special Features • UL-listed (UL-393), EX26630 • Factory Mutual (FM) approved • Reliable and economical The information contained herein is produced in good faith and is believed to be reliable but is provided for guidance and information purposes only. FPPI and its agents cannot assume liability or responsibility for results obtained in the use or misuse of its product by persons whose methods and qualifications are outside and beyond our control. It is the user's responsibility to determine the suitability of, methods of use, preparation prior to use, and appropriate installation for all products purchased from FPPI. It is the user's sole responsibility to observe and adapt such precautions as may be advisable or necessary for the protection of personnel and property in the handling and use of any of our products. 3198 LIONSHEAD AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92010 + 1 (760) 599-1168 + 1 (800) 344-1822 + 1 (800) 344-3775 FAX © 2017 Fire Protection Products, Inc. Standard Features Design EN 837-1 & ASME B40.100 Sizes 4" (100 mm) Accuracy class ± 32/s% of span (ASME B40.100 Grade B) The tolerance is reflected in the box associated with the zero mark on the face of the gauge. The value is considered zero when the pointer falls anywhere within this box. Ranges 0/80 psi, retard to 250 psi (air) 0/300 psi (ai�/3water, air/water) Working Pressure Steady: 3/4 of full scale value Fluctuating:'/2 of full scale value Short time: full scale value Operating Temperature Ambient: -40°F to 140°F (-40°C to 60°C) Media: 140°F (+60°C) maximum Temperature Error Additional error when temperature of 68°F (20°C) +0.4% for every 18°F (10°C) rising or falling. Percentage of span. S-1 VIL F P P 811 111111111IrLoo c p1Rl WATER PRINKLER I Specifications Bourdon Tube Material: copper alloy C-type Pressure Connection Material: copper alloy t/4" NPT lower mount (LM) Movement Copper alloy Dial White aluminum with stop pin; black and red lettering Pointer Black aluminum Case Black polycarbonate Powder coated steel (Air/Water Gauge only) Window Snap -in clear polycarbonate Item Numbers/Descriptions 11-550-00 Water Gauge 11-551-00 Air Gauge 11-552-00 Air Gauge w/Retard 11-553-00 Air/Water Gauge 11-553-10 Air/Water Gauge w/ Steel Case 11-558-00 Water Gauge, Personalized 11-559-00 Air/Water Gauge, Personalized 11-561-00 Air Gauge w/Retard, Personalized C@OS FM QWARNING:Gan rand Repmdudiv Han- w PHWanhgs .gov LISTED APPROVED Description Identification decals are designed to provide identification to the installed sprinkler pipe. This allows the building owner, building maintenance department or any other interested party know which pipes service the fire sprinkler system. This becomes increasingly important as mechanical systems become more sophisticated and become harder to identify as more and more similar piping materials are used in multiple uses. Installation Make sure the surface of the pipe is free from all contaminates such as oil, rust, scale dirt etc. Peel the label away from its' backing material. Position the label on the cleaned surface so that it is readily visible making sure that the directional arrow points in the direction of the flow of water. Make sure the label is firmly pressed into place. The information above is believed to be reliable and accurate, but meant for reference only. FPPI and its agents cannot be held responsible or liable for incidental or consequential damages or loss suffered by any person as a result of the use or misuse of any of the information or its product by any person whose methods and qualifications are beyond our control. It is the user's responsibility to assure that products and methods of use are suitable for the intended purpose, and the preparation prior to installation, and the installation is executed properly and according to existing code, regulations where applicable and accepted industry practices. If you are not trained on the installation of this product, seek guidance from a qualified installer. 3198 LIONSHEAD AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92010 + 1 (760) 599-1168 + 1 (800) 344-1822 + 1 (800) 344-3775 FAX 0 2017 Fire Protection Products, Inc. �•5 f I +Y•o Specifications Materials: Paper label with UV protective coating Quantity: 100 labels per roll Description: Auxiliary Drain 6"x2" Control Valve 6"x2" Do Not Hang 21/4" Round Fire Sprinkler Line 6"x2" Fire Sprinkle Riser Room 6"x18" General Information 9"x7" Hydraulic System 511x7" Inspectors Test 6"x2" Main Drain 6"x2" Multi -Use System Warning 5"x7" 'Also available in foil decal. /_N I C ET NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES® Providing Certification Programs Since 1961 James C. O'Brien Water -Based Systems Layout Level III 137108 2023-12-01 of RD4,1 WATER AVAILABILITY CERTIFICATE 1,7c. 1 Soo PERMITTING & DEVELOPMENT ENGINEERING DIVISION 3.21 5th Avenue N P: 42S.773..0220 www.edmondswa.aov ITEMS IN THIS BOX TO BE FILLED IN BY APPLICANT ® Building Permit ❑ Preliminary Plat or PUD ❑ Subdivision ❑ Rezone or Other Applicant's name: Jackson Main Architecture — Meghan Craig Proposed Use: Port of Edmonds Administration Building Location (attach map and legal description if necessary): 47i Admiral Way Updated on 811412018 Page I of 2 ITEMS IN THIS BOX TO BE FILLED IN BY EDMONDS DEVELOPMENT SERVICES DEPARTMENT Permit Number PLN2021-0012 Project Name Port of Edmonds Administration Building R 1. X a. Water will be provided by service connection only to an existing 8-inch (size) water main that is adjacent to the site. OR ❑ b. Water service will require an improvement to the water system of: ❑ (1). feet of water main to reach the site; and/or ❑ (z). The construction of a distribution system on the site; and/or ❑ (3). Other (describe): z. ® a. The water system is in conformance with a City approved water comprehensive plan. OR ❑ b. The water system improvement will require a water comprehensive plan amendment. (This will cause a delay in permit issuance and approval.) 3. ® a. The proposed project is within the corporate limits of the City, or has been granted Boundary Review board approval for extension of service outside the City, or is within the City approved service area of a private water purveyor. OR ❑ b. Annexation or Boundary Review Board approval will be necessary to provide service. 4. Z a. Water is/or will be available at the rate of flow and duration indicated below at no less than zo psi Measured at the nearest fire hydrant 6o feet from the building/property (or as marked on attached map) Rate of Flow Duration ❑ Lessthan Soo gpm. (approximately gpm) ❑ Less than one (i) hour O 500 to 999 gpm ❑ One (1) to two (2) hours ❑ i5oo gpm or more ® Two (2) hours or more ❑ Flow test of gpm ❑ Other ® Calculation of 56o5 gpm (Commercial building permits require flow test or calculation) OR ❑ b. Water will system is not capable of providing fire flow. WATER AGENCY CERTIFICATION COMMENTS/CONDITIONS: Per model Static Pressure is i 0.20 Psi at i000 qpm, residual pressure is 12Psi at max flow Of 2185 qpm, residual pressure is 3.o6 psi I hereby certify that the above water purveyor information is true. This certification shall be valid for one year from date of signature. City of Edmonds Russell Lynch (Agency Name) Signatory Printed me Associate En ineer (Title) (Signature/Date) Updated on 811412018 Page 2 of 2 OWNER'S INFORMATION CERTIFICATE Name and address of property to be protected with sprinkler protection: Port of Edmonds 471 Admiral Way, Edmonds, WA Name of owner: Port of Edmonds Existing or planned construction is: ❑■ Fire -resistive or noncombustible ❑ Wood frame or ordinary (masonry walls with wood beams) ❑ Unknown Describe the intended use of the building: Mixed use, Business, Mercantile, S-1 storage, Garage Note regarding speculative buildings: The design and installation of the fire sprinkler system is dependent on an accurate description of the likely use of the building. Without specific information, assumptions will need to be made that will limit the actual use of the building. Make sure that you communicate any and all use considerations to the fire sprinkler contractor in this form and that you abide by all limitations regarding the use of the building based on the limitations of the fire sprinkler system that is eventually designed and installed. Is the system installation intended for one of the following special occupancies: Aircraft hangar ❑ Yes ❑■ No Fixed guide way transit system ❑ Yes ❑■ No Race track stable ❑ Yes ❑9 No Marine terminal, pier, or wharf ❑ Yes ❑■ No Airport terminal ❑ Yes ❑■ No Aircraft engine test facility ❑ Yes ❑■ No Power plan ❑ Yes ❑■ No Water-cooling tower ❑ Yes ❑■ No If the answer to any of the above is "yes," the appropriate NFPA standard should be referenced for sprinkler density/area criteria. Indicate whether any of the following special materials are intended to be present: Flammable or combustible liquids ❑ Yes ❑e No Aerosol products ❑ Yes❑ No Nitrate film ❑ Yes ❑■ No Pyroxylin plastic ❑ Yes ❑■ No Compressed or liquefied gas cylinders ❑ Yes ❑■ No Liquid or solid oxidizers ❑ Yes ❑■ No Organic peroxide formulations ❑ Yes ❑■ No Idle pallets ❑ Yes ❑■ No If the answer to any of the above is "yes," describe type, location, arrangement, and intended maximum quantities. I:\AD\015\02\2Y15\2Y15014.docx NFPA 13 Fig. A.22.1(b) Page 1 of 2 Indicate whether the protection is intended for one of the following specialized occupancies or areas: Spray area or mixing room ❑ Yes ❑■ No Solvent extraction ❑ Yes ❑■ No Laboratory using chemicals ❑ Yes ❑� No Oxygen -fuel gas system for welding or cutting ❑ Yes ❑■ No Acetylene cylinder charging ❑ Yes ❑■ No Production or use of compressed or liquefied gases ❑ Yes ❑■ No Commercial cooking operation ❑ Yes ❑■ No Class A hyperbaric chamber ❑ Yes ❑■ No Cleanroom ❑ Yes ❑■ No Incinerator or waste handling system ❑ Yes ❑■ No Linen handling system ❑ Yes ❑■ No Industrial furnace ❑ Yes ❑■ No Water-cooling tower ❑ Yes ❑■ No If the answer to any of the above is "yes," describe type, location, arrangement, and intended maximum quantities. Will there be any storage of products over 12 ft. (3.6m) in height? Yes ❑ No ❑■ If the answer is "yes," describe product, intended storage arrangement, and height. Will there be any storage of plastic, rubber, or similar products over 5 ft. (1.5 m) high except as described above? Yes ❑ No ■❑ If the answer is "yes," describe product, intended storage arrangement, and height. Is there any special information concerning the water supply? Yes ❑ No ❑■ If the answer is "yes," provide the information, including known environmental conditions that might be responsible for corrosion, including microbiologically influenced corrosion (MIC). I certify that I have knowledge of the intended use of the property and that the above information is correct. Signature of owner's representative or agent: James C OBrlen'pma 1°ea°°°°1l° °�°mP�° onCNJamesCpef1enE Date: 02/20/2023 Name of owner's representative or agent completing certificate (print): James C OBrlen Relationship and firm of agent (print): Moore Fire Protection: Sprinkler Subcontractor I:\AD\015\02\2Y15\2Y15014.docx NFPA 13 Fig. A.22.1(b) Page 2 of 2